Toshiba 19DV616DG, 22DV616DG Schematic

Download

Page 1

FILE NO. 810-200967GR

SERVICE MANUAL

LCD TV/DVD COMBINATION

19DV616DG 22DV616DG

The above models are classified as green products (*1), as indicated by the underlined serial numbers.

This Service Manual describes replacement parts for the green products. When repairing these green

product(s), use the part(s) described in this manual and lead-free solder (*2).

For (*1) and (*2), see the next page.

DOCUMENT CREATED IN JAPAN, June, 2009 GREEN

Page 2



The EC is actively promoting the WEEE & RoHS Directives that define standards for recycling and reuse of Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment and for the Restriction of the use of certain Hazardous Substances. From July 1, 2006, the RoHS Directive will prohibit any marketing of new products containing the restricted substances.

Increasing attention is given to issues related to the global environmental. Toshiba Corporation recognizes environmental protection as a key management tasks, and is doing its utmost to enhance and improve the quality and scope of its environmental activities. In line with this, Toshiba proactively promotes Green Procurement, and seeks to purchase and use products, parts and materials that have low environmental impacts.

Green procurement of parts is not only confined to manufacture. The same green parts used in manufacture must also be used as replacement parts.

GREEN PRODUCT PROCUREMENT



This product is manufactured using lead-free solder as a part of a movement within the consumer products industry at large to be environmentally responsible. Lead-free solder must be used in the servicing and repair of this product.

LEAD-FREE SOLDER

WARNING

This product is manufactured using lead free solder.

DO NOT USE LEAD BASED SOLDER TO REPAIR THIS PRODUCT !

with lead-free solder may result in damage to the component and or PCB being soldered. Great care should be made to ensure high-quality soldering when servicing this product especially when solderin required to melt lead-free solder is high.

large components, through-hole pins, and on PCBs as the level of heat

19DV616DG/22DV616DG

Page 3

…

TABLE OF CONTENT

• GREEN PRODUCT PROCUREMENT

• LEAD-FREE SOLDER

• TABLE OF CONTENTS

• OWNER'S MANUAL

SERVICING NOTICES ON CHECKING………………………………………………………………… HOW TO ORDER PARTS………………………………………………………………………………… IMPORTANT……………………………………………………………………………………………… WHEN REPLACING DVD DECK………………………………………………………………………… DISC REMOVAL METHOD AT NO POWER SUPPLY……………………………………………… PARENTAL CONTROL - RATING LEVEL…………………………………………………………… HOTEL MODE FUNCTION……………………………………………………………………………… TRAY LOCK……………………………………………………………………………………………… REMOTE CONTROL KEY CODE……………………………………………………………………… GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS…………………………………………………………………………… DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS

1. REMOVAL OF MECHANICAL PARTS AND P. C. BOARDS…………………………………

2. REMOVAL OF DVD DECK PARTS………………………………………………………………

3. REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF FLAT PACKAGE IC……………………………………

SERVICE MODE LIST…………………………………………………………………………………… SERVICING FIXTURES AND TOOLS………………………………………………………………… RE-WRITE FOR DVD FIRMWARE……………………………………………………………………… WHEN REPLACING EEPROM (MEMORY) IC………………………………………………………… ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENTS………………………………………………………………………… TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE…………………………………………………………………………… BLOCK DIAGRAMS

DVD……………………………………………………………………………………………………… POWER………………………………………………………………………………………………… 21PIN/TUNER………………………………………………………………………………………… REGULATOR…………………………………………………………………………………………… F-9, F-10 SCALER/SUB MICON………………………………………………………………………………… SOUND AMP/AV SWITCH/JACK/INTERFACE_HDMI IC………………………………………… DIGITAL…………………………………………………………………………………………………

PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS

DVD MT………………………………………………………………………………………………… DIGITAL………………………………………………………………………………………………… MAIN/TUNER…………………………………………………………………………………………… G-9~G-16 POWER/OPERATION/REMOCON………………………………………………………………… LOADING MOTOR/PCB………………………………………………………………………………

SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS

MPEG/MICON/DSP/RF_AMP………………………………………………………………………… H-1~H-4 MEMORY……………………………………………………………………………………………… MOTOR DRIVE…………………………………………………………………………………………

UDIO/VIDEO……………………………………………………………………………………………H-13~H-16 21PIN…………………………………………………………………………………………………… REGULATOR…………………………………………………………………………………………… H-21~H-24 REGULATOR2…………………………………………………………………………………………

V SWITCH………………………………………………………………………………………………H-29~H-32 SOUND AMP MUTE…………………………………………………………………………………… TUNER………………………………………………………………………………………………… SCALER…………………………………………………………………………………………………

A1-1 A1-1 A1-1 A1-2 A1-3 A1-3 A1-4 A1-4 A1-5 A2-1~A2-12

B1-1~B1-6 B2-1~B2-5 B3-1, B3-2 C-1 C-2 C-2 C-3, C-4 D-1~D-14 E-1~E-10

F-1, F-2 F-3~F-6 F-7, F-8

F-11, F-12 F-13, F-14 F-15, F-16

G-1~G-4 G-5~G-8

G-17~G-24 G-25

H-5~H-8 H-9~H-12

H-17~H-20

H-25~H-28

H-33~H-36 H-37~H-40 H-41~H-44

19DV616DG/22DV616DG

Page 4

…

TABLE OF CONTENT

SUB MICON………………………………………………………………………………………………H-45~H-48 JACK…………………………………………………………………………………………………… INTERFACE_HDMI IC………………………………………………………………………………… DVD_INTERFACE/AV_SWITCH…………………………………………………………………… PANEL_INTERFACE…………………………………………………………………………………

SIC……………………………………………………………………………………………………… H-65~H-68 FLASH/SDRAM………………………………………………………………………………………… COMMON INTERFACE……………………………………………………………………………… POWER IN/OUT……………………………………………………………………………………… OFDM_DEMODULATOR……………………………………………………………………………… H-81~H-84 POWER………………………………………………………………………………………………… BACKLIGHT INVERTER……………………………………………………………………………… SOUND AMP…………………………………………………………………………………………… JACK OUT……………………………………………………………………………………………… LOADING MOTOR……………………………………………………………………………………

INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM……………………………………………………………………… WAVEFORMS……………………………………………………………………………………………… MECHANICAL EXPLODED VIEWS…………………………………………………………………… DVD DECK EXPLODED VIEW………………………………………………………………………… MECHANICAL REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST………………………………………………………… DVD DECK REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST…………………………………………………………… ELECTRICAL REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST…………………………………………………………

H-49~H-52 H-53~H-56 H-57~H-60 H-61~H-64

H-69~H-72 H-73~H-76 H-77~H-80

H-85~H-88 H-89~H-92 H-93~H-96 H-97~H-100 H-101, H-102 H-103~H-106 I-1, I-2 J1-1~J1-6 J2-1 K1-1~K1-4 K2-1, K2-2 K3-1~K3-10

19DV616DG/22DV616DG

Page 5

EU Conformity Statement

“This product is marked with “CE” and complies therefore with the applicable harmonized European standards listed under the Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC and the EMC Directive 2004/108/EC.”

Responsible for CE-marking is TOSHIBA INFORMATION SYSTEMS (U.K.) LTD, Toshiba Court, Weybridge Business Park, Addlestone Road, Weybridge, Surrey, KT15 2UL, United Kingdom

Following information is only for EU-member states:

The use of the symbol indicates that this product may not be treated as household waste. By ensuring this product is disposed of correctly, you will help prevent potential negative consequences for the environment and human health, which could otherwise be caused by inappropriate waste handling of this product. For more detailed information about recycling of this product, please contact your local city office, your household waste disposal service or the shop where you purchased the product.

Following information is only valid for EU-member States: Disposal of batteries and/or accumulators

The crossed out wheeled dust bin symbol indicates that batteries and/or accumulators must be collected and disposed of separately from household waste.

If the battery or accumulator contains more than the specifi ed values of lead (Pb), mercury (Hg), and/or cadmium (Cd) defi ned in the Battery Directive (2006/66/EC), then the chemical symbols for lead (Pb), mercury (Hg) and/or cadmium (Cd) will appear below the crossed out wheeled dust bin symbol.

By participating in separate collection of batteries, you will help to assure the proper disposal of products and batteries and thus help to prevent potential negative consequences for the environment and human health.

For more detailed information about the collection and recycling programmes available in your country, please contact your local city office or the shop where you purchased the product.

J52R0131A SH 09/04

LCD TV/DVD COMBINATION

19DV615DG 19DV616DG 22DV615DG 22DV616DG 26DV615DG

OWNER’S MANUAL

Owner’s Record

The model number and serial number are on the back of your TV/DVD. Record these numbers in the spaces below. Refer to these numbers whenever you communicate with your Toshiba dealer about this TV/DVD.

Model number: Serial number:

Precautions

CAUTION:

THIS UNIT IS A CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT. HOWEVER THIS UNIT USES A VISIBLE LASER BEAM WHICH COULD CAUSE HAZARDOUS RADIATION EXPOSURE IF DIRECTED. BE SURE TO OPERATE THE PLAYER CORRECTLY AS INSTRUCTED.

THE FOLLOWING CAUTION LABEL IS LOCATED ON THE REAR PANEL OF THE UNIT.

CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT

WHEN THIS UNIT IS PLUGGED INTO THE WALL OUTLET, DO NOT PLACE YOUR EYES CLOSE TO THE OPENINGS TO LOOK INTO THE INSIDE OF THIS UNIT.

USE OF CONTROLS OR ADJUSTMENTS OR PERFORMANCE OF PROCEDURES OTHER THAN THOSE SPECIFIED HEREIN MAY RESULT IN HAZARDOUS RADIATION EXPOSURE.

DO NOT OPEN COVERS AND DO NOT REPAIR YOURSELF. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED PERSONNEL.

Headphone Warning

Loud music can damage your hearing irreversibly, therefore do not set the volume to a high level when listening through headphones, particularly for extended listening periods.

Information for the DVB-T function

•

Any function relative to the digital television (with the DVB logo) is available only within the country or area where such signals are transmitted. Verify with the salesman if it is possible to receive a DVB-T signal in the zone where you live.

•

Even if the television conforms to the DVB-T specifications, the compatibility to future digital DVB-T transmissions is not guaranteed. Some digital television functions may not be available in some countries.

• The DVB-T system present in this device is FTA (Free to air).

•

* The “HD ready” Logo is a trademark of EICTA. * DVB is a registered trademark of the DVB Project. This logo indicates that the product is compliant with

European Digital Broadcasting.

Possible Adverse Effects on LCD Screen: If a fixed (non-moving) pattern remains on the LCD screen for long periods of time, the image can become permanently engrained in the LCD TV panel and cause subtle but permanent ghost images. This type of damage is NOT COVERED BY YOUR WARRANTY. Never leave your TV on for long periods of time while it is displaying the following formats or images:

• Fixed Images, such as stock tickers, video game patterns, TV station logos, and websites.

• Special Formats that do not use the entire screen. For example, viewing letterbox style (16:9) media on a normal (4:3) display (Black bars at top and bottom of screen); or viewing normal style (4:3) media on a widescreen (16:9) display (Black bars on left and right sides of screen).

The examples used throughout this manual are based on the 26DV615DG model.

Precautions ........................................................... 2

Contents ............................................................... 3

Important safety information.................................. 4

Location of controls ............................................... 6

Remote Control ..................................................... 7

Aerial connection ..................................................9

Auto setup........................................................... 10

Quick guide for ANALOG MENU operation ........ 11

Selecting the video input source .........................11

On-screen Language Selection .......................... 11

Automatic station presetting with the built-in Tuner

Changing the order of stored channels ...............12

Manual TV station presetting .............................. 13

Basic Operation ..................................................14

Teletext ............................................................... 15

Stereo reception with the built-in analogue tuner ..16

Picture format...................................................... 17

Other convenience functions .............................. 18

Guide to using the Digital Menu system .............. 19

Language Setup ................................................. 20

Auto Scan ...........................................................20

Manual Scan ....................................................... 21

Carrier Setup ...................................................... 21

Channel Organizer .............................................. 22

Display Setup ...................................................... 24

Time Setup ......................................................... 24

Password Setup (Parental lock) .......................... 25

Version ................................................................26

Software Upgrade ............................................... 26

Common Interface .............................................. 26

Channel list .........................................................27

Channel banner .................................................. 27

Multi audio .......................................................... 28

DVB-Subtitle ....................................................... 28

Using the Digital Service (UK only) .....................28

EPG (Electronic Program Guide) ........................29

EPG Timer .......................................................... 30

.. 12

Contents

Disc..................................................................... 31

Playing a disc ...................................................... 32

Zooming .............................................................. 35

Locating desired scene ....................................... 35

Marking desired scenes ...................................... 36

Repeat playback ................................................. 37

A-B Repeat playback ..........................................37

Changing angles ................................................. 38

Title selection ...................................................... 38

DVD menu .......................................................... 38

Changing soundtrack language ..........................39

Subtitles .............................................................. 39

Disc status ..........................................................39

MP3/JPEG/DivX

Program playback ............................................... 46

Random playback ............................................... 46

Customizing The Function Settings .....................47

Temporary cancel the rating level by DVD disc ... 51

Language Code List ............................................ 52

PC connection .................................................... 53

Connecting an HDMI or a DVI device to the HDMI input

Connection to other equipment ........................... 55

Status message ..................................................57

Troubleshooting table .......................................... 58

Specifications ..................................................... 59

and Audio CD operation ......... 40

.. 54

Page 6

Important safety information

This unit has been produced according to all current safety regulations. The following safety tips should safeguard users against careless use and the dangers connected with such use.

Although this appliance has been carefully manufactured and rigorously checked prior to leaving the

• factory, as with all electrical appliances it is possible for problems to develop. If you notice smoke, an excessive build-up of heat or any other unexpected phenomena, you should disconnect the plug from the mains power socket immediately. Ensure that the unit is sufficiently ventilated! Never place next to or underneath curtains!

• This set should be only be connected to an AC 220~240V / 50Hz mains power supply - do not attempt to

• connect it to any other type of supply. The apparatus must be connected to a main socket outlet with a protective earthing connection.

• The socket-outlet must be installed near the equipment and easily accessible.

• Any repairs must be carried out by qualified service personnel only.

• Do not open this unit. A non-expert attempting to repair the unit could be dangerous and potentially cause

• a fire hazard. Keep away from rodents. Rodents (and also cockatiels) enjoy biting into electric flexes.

• The animal can cause a short cut (fire hazard!) and receive a fatal electric shock.

• Always hold plug when pulling out plug from power mains supply system. Do not pull on flex. The flex can

• become overloaded and cause a short cut. Never wet clean. Only use a damp cloth, the same as when cleaning furniture.

• Set up unit so that no one is able to trip over the flex.

• This unit is recommended to be installed on shock-free benches in order to avoid any danger from falling.

• Only use the unit on a stable, shock-free base in order to avoid any danger from falling.

• Take note that toddlers can pull the unit down from the table or cupboard by means of its flex. Children

• can hurt themselves when doing this. Do not use the unit near heat sources. The casing and flex could be damaged by the impact of heat.

• The screen is made of glass and can break if damage is done to it. Be careful when collecting sharp-

• edged glass splitters. You could be hurt or the unit could be damaged.

• If the unit is mounted on the wall, contact the shop where you purchased the unit for advice, and leave the

• installation work to experts. Incomplete installation work can cause you injuries. When installing the set on a wall, allow at least 10 cm clearance between the rear of the set and the wall.

• Clearance of less than 10 cm will obstruct the vents and cause the interior of the set to overheat, resulting in faults or damage to the set. Taking fall-prevention measures

•

- If these measures are not taken, the unit can fall and you could be injured.

- Contact the shop where you purchased the unit to obtain full details of the measures. When a TV stand is used,

•

- Ensure the unit is fully on the stand and placed in the centre.

- Do not leave the stand doors open.

- You could be hurt as a result of the unit falling or breaking, or your fingers being caught or jammed. Take

extra precautions if you have children.

Avoid placing the unit on any surfaces that may be subject to vibrations or shocks.

• To protect the unit during a thunder storm unplug the AC power cord and disconnect the aerial. Caution:

• Do not touch the aerial connector. When you leave your home for a long period of time, unplug the AC power cord for safety reasons.

• The unit becomes warm when in operation. Do not place any covers or blankets on the unit in order to

• prevent overheating. The ventilation holes are not to be blocked. Do not set up near radiators. Do not place in direct sunshine. When placing on a shelf leave 10 cm free space around the whole unit. Make some space around TV (Correct shelf assembly).

• The apparatus shall not be exposed to dripping or splashing and that no objects filled with liquids, such

• as vases, shall be placed on the apparatus. Liquids spilled into the unit can cause serious damage. Switch the set OFF and disconnect the mains power supply, then consult a qualified service person before attempting to use the unit again. Moisture condensation occurs, for example, when you pour a cold drink into a glass on a warm day. Drops

• of water form on the outside of the glass. In the same way, moisture may condense on the optical pick-up lens inside this unit, one of the most crucial internal parts of the unit. Moisture condensation occurs during the following cases.

•

- When you bring the unit directly from a cold place to a warm place.

- When you use the unit in a room where you just turned on the heater, or a place where the cold wind

from the air conditioner directly hits the unit.

- In summer, when you use the unit in a hot and humid place just after you move the unit from an air

conditioned room.

- When you use the unit in a humid place. Do not use the unit when moisture condensation may occur.

• If you use the unit in such a situation, it may damage discs and internal parts. Remove the disc, connect

• the mains lead of the unit to the mains power outlet, turn on the unit, and leave it for two or three hours. After two or three hours, the unit will have warmed up and evaporated any moisture. Keep the unit

connected to the mains power outlet and moisture condensation will seldom occur.

Important safety information

Where to install

Locate the television away from direct sunlight and strong lights, soft, indirect lighting is recommended for comfortable viewing. Use curtains or blinds to prevent direct sunlight falling on the screen.

Place on a sturdy platform, the mounting surface should be flat and steady. It should then be secured to the wall with a sturdy tie using the clip on the back of the stand, or secured to the platform using the fixing strap located underneath the table top stand, this will prevent it from falling over.

The LCD display panels are manufactured using an extremely high level of precision technology, however sometimes some parts of the screen may be missing picture elements or have luminous spots. This is not a sign of a malfunction.

Make sure the television is located in a position where it cannot be pushed or hit by objects, as pressure will break or damage the screen, and that small items cannot be inserted into slots or openings in the case.

Retractable pedestal stand and locating the LCD TV

Observe the following safety precautions:

1) Ensure that unpacking and transfer of the unit is carried out by two or more people.

2) Put the LCD TV on a large level area in a recumbent posture.

3) Grab the pedestal stand and lift the display up. Confirm the pivot is locked.

4) Place the TV on a sturdy, level surface that can support the weight of the TV.

5) Be sure to secure the TV to a wall stud, pillar, surface, or other immovable structure. To secure the TV in this manner: (1) attach a clip to an immovable structure, then (2) pass a sturdy strap through the clip and attach each end to the hooks located at the back of the TV. Be sure to leave at least 10 cm between the TV and the wall or similar structure

for ventilation

To fold the pedestal stand

1) Slide the lever on the back side of the pedestal stand to the left.

2) Lay the display down.

NOTE: Do not operate the LCD TV when the pedestal stand is folded. The pedestal stand should not be folded at any time except for packing purposes.

Please take note

EXCLUSION CLAUSE

Toshiba shall under no circumstances be liable for loss and/or damage to the product caused by: i) fire; ii) earthquake; iii) accidental damage; iv) intentional misuse of the product; v) use of the product in improper conditions; vi) loss and/or damage caused to the product whilst in the possession of a third party; vii) any damage or loss caused as a result of the owner’s failure and/or neglect to follow the instructions

set out in the owner’s manual;

viii) any loss or damage caused directly as a result of misuse or malfunction of the product when used

simultaneously with associated equipment;

Furthermore, under no circumstances shall Toshiba be liable for any consequential loss and/or damage including but not limited to the following, loss of profit, interruption of business, the loss of recorded data whether caused during normal operation or misuse of the product.

If stationary images generated by text services, channel identification logos, computer displays, video games, on screen menus, etc. are left on the television screen for any length of time they could become conspicuous, it is always advisable to reduce both the brightness and contrast settings.

Sturdy tie (as short as possible)

Screw hole

Slide the lever to the left

Back side of the pedestal stand

Clip

Hooks

Screw

Band

Top ViewSide View

Location of controls

Disc slot

Adjusting the angle of the base (except 26DV615DG)

You can adjust the angle of the TV-screen for 3° forward or for 10° backward from vertical angle. Hold the base of the TV while adjusting the angle.

Description of Indicators and Controls

1. Remote sensor

(Power) indicator: The LED indicator lights up red in standby mode, orange in standby mode

when the timer is activated, and green in the power ON mode.

3. Loudspeakers

(EJECT): Eject a disc.

(Volume) +/– buttons / In Menu: Setting.

(Channel) /PLAY () button: Press to change to a higher numbered channel set into

memory. DVD mode : Playback. In Menu: Setting. In Standby: Turning on the unit.

(Channel) /STOP () button: Press to change to a lower numbered channel set into

memory. DVD mode : Stop. In Menu: Setting. In Standby: Turning on the unit.

8. MENU button: To display the analogue menu screen.

(INPUT SELECT) button: Select input mode. In Menu : Using as ENTER button.

10.

(TV) button: Preparation: Connect power-cable to 230V/50Hz.

a) If standby-LED is red, you may turn-off. To turn-off, press TV button 1x and release. For confirmation, standby-LED will turn off. b) If standby-LED is off, you may turn-on. To turn-on, press TV button 1x and release. For confirmation, standby-LED will change to red and about 1 second later to green. c) If the TV is currently working, press TV button 1x and release to turn-off. For confirmation, standby-LED will turn off. In TV-off-condition, the unit cannot be turned-on by pressing

In TV-off-condition, the TV’s power-consumption is approx. 1 Watt.

If total disconnection from the mains power is required, please unplug the mains lead.

6 7 8 9 10

on the remote control.

Remote Control

Function Page Eject a disc 33

Select to operate TV/DVD 11, 32

Switches between the analogue TV and the digital TV 11, 20

Enter standby mode or turn on the power 10

Select channel Select Teletext page Enter password Activate the channel organizer function Display program position number Teletext time display Turn the sound on/off 14

Toggle between the TV and radio mode 27

Select an input source 11

Change the TV channel or Teletext page up or down In Standby: Turn on the power

Volume 14

Select menu of a DVD disc 38

Select title of a DVD disc 38

Activate the digital menu 20

Display the EPG (Electronic Progr. Guide) 29, 30

Cursor buttons 10

Memorize Teletext page 100 CH LIST Call Setup menu Activate the analogue menu

Exit the menu screen Cancel marking

Remove DVD set up menu 47, 51

Play 32

Stop 32

Hold the text page Skip chapter to reverse direction Reveal quiz page answers Review playpack Sub page selection Forward playback Teletext enlargement Skip chapter to forward direction Fastext/TOPtext buttons DVD control buttons Marking desired scene 36

Change playback angle of a DVD disc 38 Repeat playback between A and B (DVD/CD) 37 Teletext ON/OFF

Start Digital Service Display the subtitle 28, 39

Select between the available broadcast audio Display the multi audio menu Change sound track language of DVD Switches between the present channel and the last selected channel Zoom (for DVD playback) Locating desired scene 35

Select picture format 17 Sleep Timer 14

14 15 25, 50 22 14, 27, 29, 39

14, 15 11

10 15 14 47 11

11 36

15 34 15 34 15 34 15 34 15 34, 37

15 28

16 28 39

14 35

Page 7

Remote Control

Install the batteries

Use batteries type UM4/R03 (AAA-Size). Do not use old or weak batteries. The remote control may not work properly with a weak voltage from such batteries. Replace exhausted batteries with new ones. Never try to recharge normal batteries - this could cause an explosion.

Note:

Exhausted batteries can leak corrosive electrolyte, which may cause damage to the remote control therefore remove exhausted batteries immediately.

Open the battery

compartment.

Install the batteries as shown

below, ensuring the correct polarity.

Close the battery

compartment.

Aerial connection

Note: Before you connect other appliances:

To avoid potentially damaging your set, make sure all items are switched off and disconnected from the

•

mains power when you make the connections. Arrange the desired connection.

•

When you have finished making the connections, reconnect the mains power to the unit and switch it

•

back on.

Connect your aerial as shown below. Connections to other equipment is explained further on pages 53~57. If you have problems with reception, consult a specialist of aerial.

Illustration of 19DV615DG/19DV616DG/22DV615DG/22DV616DG

(L)

(M)

(K)

Illustration of 26DV615DG

(L)

(M)

ANT.

Distance of Remote Control Operation

Remote sensor

Maximum distance approx. 5m

Transmitter window

30 30

Point the remote control directly at the remote sensor.

The remote control handset will not work properly in the following cases:

If bright sunlight directly beams onto the unit front. If an obstacle is placed between the unit and the

If the batteries have not been installed according to their polarities.

handset.

If the batteries are weak.

Auto setup

Your unit has an Automatic installation which makes installation in your unit easy. When you turn on the unit for the first time, the Automatic installation routine is activated. Using this routine, you can select the on-screen language and automatically search for and store all the receivable analogue and digital (DVB) channels. The Automatic station presetting feature is for the set’s built-in tuner only. If you have a device such as a digital decoder (eg. Satellite or Digital Terrestrial) connected (see page 55), you would need to tune it in separately according to its own instructions.

Note:

•

To cancel the Auto Tuning, press EXIT during the process.

•

If on the “AUTO INSTALLATION COUNTRY” screen “UK” is selected, “Change No.” and “Move To” cannot be used in UK (see page 23).

THE AUTOMATIC TUNING PROCESS WILL ONLY START BY ITSELF THE FIRST TIME YOU SWITCH THE SET ON. HOWEVER YOU CAN RESTART THIS PROCESS VIA THE MENU SYSTEM (see page 12 for analogue channels, and page 20 for digital channels).

Preparation:

Press

on the unit.

AUTO INSTALLATION menu will

appear. Press  or  to select LANGUAGE, then press ENTER. Press  or  to select desired language. Then press ENTER.

Press  or  to select COUNTRY,

then press ENTER. Press  or  to select your country. Then press ENTER.

Press  or  to select AUTO

TUNING, then press ENTER. The confirmation screen will be displayed. Press ENTER to start automatic tuning. Your TV will now automatically tune in all available channels. Your TV will tune the analogue channels first, then tune the digital channels.

Note:

Please be patient - the Auto

• Tuning process can take several minutes to complete.

When the programme on the screen stops changing and the sound comes on, the search process is complete.

EXIT : END MENU: RETURN

(ANALOGUE)

Auto Scan

001 BBC ONE 002 BBC TWO 007 BBC THREE

Carrier :1

Frequency (kHz) :562000

Searching... Progress

AUTO INSTALLATION

LANGUAGE

COUNTRY

AUTO TUNING

ENGLISH

AUTO INSTALLATION

LANGUAGE

COUNTRY

AUTO TUNING

GERMANY

AUTO INSTALLATION

LANGUAGE

COUNTRY

AUTO TUNING

10 %

DVB-T 16QAM

:003

Radio

070 BBC Radio 1

Exit

(DIGITAL)

ENGLISH

GERMANY

ENGLISH

GERMANY

ENGLISH

GERMANY

(B)

(K)

ANT.

(A) (B) (C) (D) (E) (F)(G)(H) (I) (J)

(A)

Power supply: Connect the supplied power cable to an AC 220-240V/50Hz mains power supply only - do

not attempt to connect it to any other type of supply. Never try to repair a damaged AC power cord with isolation-tape - this should be repaired by a specialist or rep laced. Do not let your pet loose near the cable. Animals biting into the cable could receive a fatal electric shock, and could cause a hazard to others.

(B) HEADPHONE jack: Plug headphones with a mini plug (3.5 mm) into this jack. (C) COMPONENT input: See page 57. (D) AV2 input: Input for analogue A/V-Signal (Composite or S-Video). See page 56. (E) Digital audio output: Digital output for CD/DVD & DVB-T (see page 56). (F) PC MONITOR input (PC): See page 53. (G) Scart socket (AV1): For the connection of scart cable. See pages 55~56. (H) PC/HDMI AUDIO input: See pages 53, 54. (I) HDMI input : See page 54. (J) Aerial input socket: Connect the outdoor aerial to the aerial input socket as shown. (K) C.I. slot: The Common Interface allows you to insert CAM (Conditional Access Module) and a suitable

Smart Card to give you access to additional Pay-TV ser vices. (See page 26) Before inserting the module, make sure to turn off the main power and then insert the module all the way into the slot until it is flushed with the side panel buttons.

(L) Bracket holes: Fix a wall mounting bracket (not supplied) here. (M)

INPUT cover: When you access the input jacks, remove this cover (except 22DV615DG/22DV616DG). (N) AV3 input: Input for analogue A/V-Signal (Composite). See page 56. (O) Scart socket (AV1/AV2): For the connection of scart cable. See pages 55~56. (P) HDMI1/HDMI2 input : See page 54.

(A) (E) (N) (C) (O) (H)(F)(P) (J)

Quick guide for ANALOG MENU operation/Selecting the

video input source/On-screen Language Selection

Make sure the aerial connection and power supply are connected as per the description on previous page.

Preparations:

Turn on the unit with the

•

on the unit. The will light up in green. To change the unit to standby mode, press

(Power) indicator will change from green to red. To turn on the unit from standby mode, press remote control again. In standby mode, you can also turn the unit on with

on the unit or PAGE / on

the remote control. To turn off the unit press on the unit - to completely switch it off, disconnect the mains power supply. Press TV/DVD to select the TV mode.

•

Press ATV/DTV to select the

• analogue TV mode.

:001

(Power) indicator

on the remote control.

(Channel) or

Quick guide for ANALOG MENU operation

Call ANALOG MENU and for example: Select AUTO TUNING.

Press INPUT.

button

Select ATV. Press MENU.

Press  or  to select .

on the

Press  or  to select AUTO

TUNING, then press ENTER to enter the AUTO TUNING menu.

button

... on the following pages the MENU can be called in the same way as here.

Press EXIT to return to the normal screen.

Selecting the video input source

Press INPUT to view a signal from another device connected to your TV, such as a VCR or DVD player. You can select each input source depending on which input jacks you used to connect your devices. To select the video input source, press  /. Then press ENTER within 6 seconds.

•

You can return to ATV mode by pressing a numbered button even if you switched to external input mode from DTV mode.

AUTO TUNING

MANUAL TUNING

CH ALLOCATION

LANGUAGE

ENGLISH

VERTICAL POSITION 0

AUTO 4:3 DEFAULT

AUTO TUNING

MANUAL TUNING

CH ALLOCATION

LANGUAGE

ENGLISH

VERTICAL POSITION 0

AUTO 4:3 DEFAULT

INPUT SELECT

ATV

DTV

AV1

AV2

4:3

On-screen Language Selection

Select LANGUAGE (unless you

Note:

If no buttons are pressed for more

• than approx. 60 seconds, the MENU disappears automatically.

have already selected when the set was first switched on). Then press ENTER.

Press  or  to select the desired language.

Press EXIT to return to the normal screen.

AUTO TUNING

MANUAL TUNING

CH ALLOCATION

LANGUAGE

ENGLISH

VERTICAL POSITION 0

AUTO 4:3 DEFAULT

ENGLISH

4:3

Page 8

Automatic station presetting with the built-in Tuner/ Changing the order of stored channels

Automatic station presetting with the built-in Tuner

Perform this feature to search for and store new analogue TV programmes after the Automatic installation. (see page 10)

Preparation:

Make sure your antenna is connected to the aerial input (see page 9). Select ATV (see page 11). Then press MENU.

Select AUTO TUNING, then press

ENTER.

Select COUNTRY, then press ENTER.

Press  or  to select your country, then press ENTER.

Select START. Then press ENTER.

The automatic tuning will search for available broadcasts and should store the channels in the correct order. During the search the sound is muted. When all programs have been stored, the normal TV screen will appear.

Changing the order of stored channels

The Automatic station presetting stores the stations in a specific order. However, this order can be changed if you wish.

Select CH ALLOCATION.

Then press ENTER.

Select desired option, then press

ENTER.

After setting the each option, press MENU to return to CH

ALLOCATION menu.

Press EXIT to return to the normal screen.

Description about the each setting option: SORT: Press  or  to select the channel that you want to move, then press ENTER.

Note:

•

To restart digital auto tuning, see page 20.

•

When the COUNTRY is set to UK, the automatic tuning will search for UHF broad-casts only. When changing the order of the

• channels, it is best to start with Ch1.

Press  or  to select the position that you want to move the channel to, then press ENTER. ERASE PROGRAM: Press  or  to select the channel that you want to erase, then press ENTER. SKIP: Press  or  to select the channel that you want to skip, then press ENTER. CH LABEL: Press  or  to select channel that you want to rename, then press ENTER. Press  or  to select character, then press  or . The cursor will move to the next position. Press ENTER to set the channel label.

mark will appear.

AUTO TUNING

MANUAL TUNING

CH ALLOCATION

ENGLISH

LANGUAGE

VERTICAL POSITION 0

AUTO 4:3 DEFAULT

COUNTRY

START

AUTO TUNING

MANUAL TUNING

CH ALLOCATION

LANGUAGE

ENGLISH

VERTICAL POSITION 0

AUTO 4:3 DEFAULT

SORT

ERASE PROGRAM

SKIP

CH LABEL

Manual TV station presetting

If you like, you may manually tune a certain station into a selected program position, without deleting or modifying program position’s contents. Example: Store the BBC 2 into program position 2.

Preparation: connect aerial cable. Select program position

2. Press 2 (see page 14). OSD will indicate “2” in right upper corner. Eventually recently stored TV-channel’s name might also appear.

Press MENU. Press  or  to select

tool-page (see right). Press  or 

4:3

Note:

•

Usually fine tuning is not necessary, due to tuning’s automatically stopping at the very best position. If you fine-tune anyway, proper working of teletext-reception with built-in tuner is no longer guaranteed.

to select MANUAL TUNING. Press ENTER.

Press  or  to select COLOUR

SYSTEM, then press ENTER. Press  or  to select AUTO, PAL or SECAM, then press ENTER. Please note that PAL should be selected for use in UK.

Press  or  to select SOUND

SYSTEM, then press ENTER. Press  or  to select AUTO, B/G, I, D/K or L/L’, then press ENTER.

Press  or  to select SEARCH.

Press ENTER. Press  or , to start tuning. Tuning will stop automatically at next available station. If this does not happen to be the BBC 2, press  or  again to continue tuning for the BBC 2. Then press ENTER.

If you like to use fine-tuning, select

FINE and press ENTER. Press  or  to fine tune. See the note on this page.

To store other stations in additional memory-cells, repeat

steps 1 to 6.

Press EXIT to return to the normal screen.

AUTO TUNING

MANUAL TUNING

CH ALLOCATION

LANGUAGE

ENGLISH

VERTICAL POSITION 0

AUTO 4:3 DEFAULT

FINE 168.30MHz

COLOUR SYSTEM

SOUND SYSTEM

BBC1 168.30MHz

AUTO

FINE 168.30MHz

COLOUR SYSTEM

SOUND SYSTEM

BBC1 168.30MHz

AUTO

FINE 168.30MHz

COLOUR SYSTEM

SOUND SYSTEM

BBC1 168.30MHz

FINE 175.30MHz

COLOUR SYSTEM

SOUND SYSTEM

BBC1 175.30MHz

4:3

AUTO

Basic Operation

Note:

If the built-in tuner does not receive

• anything (e.g. if no antenna is connected) during TV-operation, then the TV-unit will change to standby after approx. 15 minutes.

Channel selection

With the numbered buttons. Example:

No. 2: Press 0 and within 2 seconds, press 2.

•

No. 29: Press 2 and within 2 seconds, press 9.

Press CH

or to change up or down a channel. This takes

approx. 2 seconds. If the auto search only stored 5 stations, only these 5 will appear. Skipped channels will not appear (see page12).

The CH LIST shows a list of all receivable programmes. They are located in channels 1 to 99. Press CH LIST to display the CH LIST. Press  or  to select the desired channel. Press CH LIST to display the selected channel. Press EXIT to exit.

QuickView

button allows you to go back to the last selected

CH RTN

channel.

Volume adjusting

Press VOL + or – to adjust the volume. The volume level indicator disappears after 4 seconds.

MUTE

Press MUTE. The sound will be cut off. MUTE will appear for approx. 4 seconds. The muting can be released by pressing MUTE again or VOL + or –.

Information display

In the analogue TV mode: Press

. Channel number and picture size setting will appear for approx. 4 seconds. In the digital TV mode: Press

. The program information will appear (see ‘Channel banner’ on page 27).

SLEEP TIMER

To set the sleep timer press SLEEP. SLEEP and the minutes will appear. Each time you press SLEEP, the SLEEP time shown will change in the order of 120, 110, 100, 90, 80, 70, 60, 50, 40, 30, 20, 10, 0. When the displayed time runs out, the unit will switch to standby. The display will disappear after approx. 4 seconds.

To cancel the sleep timer: Press SLEEP repeatedly until ‘0’ appears.

STEREO 1 ARD

AUTO

Teletext

Teletext is sent page by page. This unit is able to automatically store up to 256 pages, but they can only be accessed once they have been stored. This can take a few moments.

Fastext/TOPtext

The Fastext/TOPtext is teletext with a special directory. On the lower part of the screen there are four different coloured fields (red, green, yellow and blue). These fields lead directly to the pages shown within. The coloured buttons on the remote control correspond to the coloured fields. Press the appropriate coloured button in order to activate the desired colour field.

Switch on / off Teletext

Teletext is not transmitted by all channels. Select a channel that shows teletext.

. You will now see a teletext page. (If

Press “100” is shown without any text information, it may mean that the channel you have selected does not support teletext.) Press

again. The TV-screen will be split into two and both Teletext information and actual broadcast will be displayed at the same time. Press again in order to switch off teletext. Press again in order to switch on teletext again. The last page which was stored is now shown.

TELETEXT

Note:

You cannot select any other channels as long as

•

teletext is switched on. Switch teletext off when you want to switch over to another channel.

Select Page

Press CH

or until the page you desire

appears. Or ... enter the requested page number by using the 10 Number Buttons. And if you mistype something, just enter the complete 3-digit wrong page number then enter the desired number again. Or ... press one of the coloured teletext buttons so that a page from Fastext/TOPtext is shown.

Hold Pages

Some pages are divided up into subpages by the channel. Subpages are automatically shown in turn, as they are transmitted. In order to hold the page, press Press

again in order to display the next subpage.

Directly Select Subpages

You can directly select the subpages if required.

Example:

Page 128 from Teletext comprises of 2 subpages. In the right upper corner you will, for example, see 1/2. That means that page one of 2 subpages is being shown at the moment.

128 128 CEEFAX 21.07.03 15:01:38

Press in order to select subpage 2. 4 dashes (----) are shown. Enter 0 0 0 2. It can take a minute before subpage 0002 appears. Press

again in order to switch off the subpage feature. You can only select other teletext pages when the subpage feature is switched off.

Enlargement

In order to enlarge the display, press Either the upper or lower half of the screen is enlarged. Each time you press display of the upper or lower half of the screen or the full picture.

Answering Quiz Questions

Some pages contain quiz questions with concealed answers. Press

in order to show the answers.

Page 100

Press ENTER in order to show page 100.

you switch between the

1/2

Page 9

Stereo reception with the built-in analogue tuner

The built-in Tuner can detect and receive NICAM stereo broadcasts automatically.

Note:

In case of bad reception, the stereo

• sound also can be disturbed.

NICAM stereo sound reception:

Select NICAM, then press ENTER.

Press  or  to select AUTO or OFF. Select OFF if you do not want to receive NICAM sound.

Press EXIT to return to the normal screen.

The following types of broadcast are possible with NICAM transmissions

‘NICAM ST’ illuminates for approx. 4 seconds when a NICAM STEREO broadcast signal is received.

‘NICAM M1’ illuminates for approx. 4 seconds when a NICAM MONO A broadcast signal is received.

‘NICAM M1/M2’ illuminates for approx. 4 seconds when a NICAM MONO A and MONO B broadcast signal is received.

This will be displayed for approx. 4 seconds if a NICAM signal is received when the ‘NICAM OFF’ option is selected.

Stereo reception in Germany

‘STEREO’ illuminates for approx. 4 seconds when a STEREO broadcast signal is received.

When 2-channel sound reception is available, you can select your preferred audio with the AUDIO SELECT button.

Each time you press AUDIO SELECT, the sound channel will switch to the alternative channel available.

NICAM 2-channel sound reception (not available in Germany)

NICAM M1/M2

NICAM AUTO

BASS 25

TREBLE 25

BALANCE 0

SURROUND OFF

HDMI1 AUDIOHDMI

NICAM ST

NICAM M1

NICAM M1 / M2

NICAM OFF

STEREO

NICAM M1/M2

2-channel sound reception in Germany

SOUND 1 / 2

Picture format

The broadcaster may transmit a Wide Screen Signalling (WSS) signal which can determine the correct picture width and set it automatically when the AUTO setting is used. If you want to change this setting, you can select from the formats listed below.

AUTO

Press PIC SIZE repeatedly until AUTO

AUTO

appears.

Notes:

•

When the PICTURE SIZE is set to AUTO, the aspect ratio will automatically change according to the Wide Screen Signalling (WSS) signal, if it is available. This may be either transmitted by the broadcasting TV channel, or via a recording from a VCR etc. Any WSS signal received will only be effective in the AUTO mode - however, some DVD players / Digital Decoders etc. will automatically switch the aspect ratio via the SCART input (Pin 8 switching), even if AUTO is not selected. In any case if you want to change to a different aspect ratio to the one selected automatically, you can change it by pressing PIC SIZE.

•

In PC mode, the PICTURE SIZE feature is available only for 16:9 or 4:3 format.

•

In HDMI or COMPONENT mode of scanning rate: 720p and 1080i, the PICTURE SIZE feature is available only for 16:9 or REAL (HDMI only) format.

•

Using the special functions to change the size of the displayed image (i.e. changing the height/width ratio) for the purposes of public display or commercial gain may infringe on copyright laws.

Manual format setting

Pressing PIC SIZE repeatedly scrolls through the following options.

4:3

This mode shows a 4:3 picture in its original size and shape with vertical bands on the left and right side.

16:9

This mode is used with 16:9 signals from a Digital decoder, DVD player or other external source. This uniformly stretches a 4:3 image horizontally to fill the screen (For example, a 16:9 image is often stored “anamorphically” on a DVD, where the 16:9 image is stored as a horizontally compressed 4:3 image - this mode restores the image to its correct 16:9 proportions).

CINEMA:

This mode is used to zoom-in on (expand) 4:3 ‘letterbox’ format pictures (with black bars at the top and bottom) so that they fill more of the screen.

Note:

• In the CINEMA mode, part of the picture may be slightly cut off due to the expansion. However, it is possible to scroll the picture up or down to view the top or bottom part of the picture (see page 18).

14:9

This enlarges a 4:3 picture to the 14:9 format.

(16:9)

(CINEMA)

(14:9)

REAL (HDMI mode only)

The picture is displayed with original size.

Other convenience functions

You can change the default settings to convenience use.

Icon Selected Items Setup hint

PICTURE PREFERENCE

BRIGHTNESS / CONTRAST / COLOUR / TINT(NTSC) / SHARPNESS

DNR* (26DV615DG)

COLOUR TEMPERATURE Bluish (COOL) / Neutral (MEDIUM) / Reddish (WARM) BLUE BACK ON / OFF You can set the TV to automatically change to a blue screen and mute the sound if

BACKLIGHT You can use the Back light feature to adjust the screen brightness for improved

RESET Select “RESET” to reset PICTURE PREFERENCE, BRIGHTNESS, CONTRAST,

NICAM See page 16. BASS / TREBLE / BALANCE You can adjust the sound quality to your preference. SURROUND

(26DV615DG)

HDMI AUDIO (19/22DV615/616DG)/ HDMI1 AUDIO (26DV615DG)

RESET Select “RESET” to reset BASS, TREBLE and BALANCE to the factory preset

AUTO TUNING See page 12. MANUAL TUNING See page 13. CH ALLOCATION See page 12. LANGUAGE See page 11. VERTICAL POSITION When the CINEMA mode is selected (see page 17), you can adjust the vertical

AUTO 4:3 DEFAULT

SLEEP TIMER 0~120 min(every

AV1 INPUT/ AV2 INPUT (26DV615DG)

AV1 OUTPUT (19/22DV615/616DG)

AV COLOUR

REC SCREEN STATUS

RESET TV SETTING Press ENTER to enter the RESET TV SETTING screen.

Note:

In HDMI or COMPONENT (except 480i/576i) mode, the DNR option cannot be selected.

The interferences from the input are suppressed most if HIGH is set. This could result in side-effects such as loss of sharpness and

smearing.

AUTO 4:3 DEFAULT is available only for AUTO picture size setting.

In COMPONENT mode, AUTO 4:3 DEFAULT is available only for 480i/576i mode.

PAL is the colour system used in Germany. NTSC 3.58 is used in the USA, PAL 60 used in Germany handled video recorders, which

play NTSC video tape recording.

If the picture shows horizontal stripes, set to AUTO.

SPORTS Bright and dynamic picture (factory-set) STANDARD Standard picture quality (factory-set) MOVIE Movie-like picture setting (factory-set) MEMORY Your personal preferences

OFF / LO W / MEDIUM / HIGH

ON / OFF The SURROUND feature processes the audio signal to expand the listening field

4:3 / 16:9 This option selects the default way that a 4:3 signal is shown - either as normal

10 minutes) Selecting the “AV1 INPUT” or “AV2 INPUT” type - this ensures that the TV processes the

input signal correctly. Press  or  to select AV, S-VIDEO or RGB. AV Composite signal (e.g. from a video recorder). S-VIDEO S-Video signal (e.g. from DVD player with S-Video output). RGB RGB signal (e.g. from DVD player with RGB output). This determines whether the AV1 outputs the signal from the internal tuner or whatever input is shown

on the screen. TV Outputs the last channel position selected. MONITOR The picture displayed on TV-screen.

ON / OFF This function is used in conjunction with the Timer function that is included as part

You can adjust the picture to your preference. The “TINT(NTSC)” option can be selected if an NTSC 3.58MHz or NTSC 4.43MHz signal is input through one of the AV sockets, and NTSC or AUTO has been selected for the AV COLOUR option.

Sometimes it is not possible to input a high-quality HD signal. The actual signal input is too small and noisy, e.g. a video film in letterbox format, or a noisy analogue cable TV signal. DNR can slightly reduce interferences caused by the faulty input signal.

the signal is weak or absent.

picture clarity.

COLOUR, TINT(NTSC), SHARPNESS, COLOUR TEMPERATURE and BACKLIGHT to the factory preset values.

wider and deeper to create a ‘pseudo surround-sound’ from the TV’s speakers. The feature works with stereo signals from TV broadcast or AV input.

See page 54.

values.

picture position. Press  or  to adjust the vertical position of the picture by up to +10 and downwards by up to -10.

“4:3” or expanded in the “16:9” mode, according to your preferences. You can set SLEEP TIMER to automatically turn off the TV. To cancel the SLEEP

TIMER, set to “0”.

The AV Colour setting only applies when viewing devices connected to the AV inputs.

of the Digital EPG. It determines whether the TV screen switches on or not when a programmed Timer setting begins - see page 30 for further details.

Press  or  to select “YES”, then press ENTER. Reset the TV function will now begin, and this unit will automatically turn off. As the power is not automatically turned on, press

to watch TV.

Guide to using the Digital Menu system

When the set is in the digital mode, you can access the main menu by pressing DIGTAL MENU on the remote control. This main menu contains several options,

- Language Setup

- Channel Organizer

- Installation

- System Configuration

- Technical Information

- Common Interface The main menu is the gateway for all the other ‘sub’ menus. You can navigate between the different options in the main menu by pressing  or . The DIGITAL MENU button will also function like an ‘EXIT’ button, i.e. when any menu is active, pressing the DIGITAL MENU button will return to the previous stage.

Preparation:

Press ATV/DTV to select the digital TV mode.

Press DIGITAL MENU to display the Main menu.

Press  or  to select desired options. (Example: selecting the Language Setup option.)

Guide of the available buttons

Press ENTER.

The selected menu will appear.

Some of the options have a sub menu. Press  or  to select desired sub menu, then press ENTER.

(Example: sub menu in the Installation option.)

When you have finished making adjustments, press EXIT to

return to the normal screen.

Note:

In analogue TV mode, DIGITAL MENU will not work. Please press ATV/DTV to select digital TV mode to display the digital menu. However, it is possible to use the MENU in the digital TV mode. The analogue menu includes some general settings for this TV that apply to both modes, and it will be displayed over the digital TV screen.

Installation System Configuration

Channel Organizer Technical Information

Language Setup

CH1 CH2

ABC

CH3

Enter Exit

Navigate

Language Setup

Menu Language

Pref. Au

dio Language English

Pref. S

ubtitle Language

Pref. Digital Se

rvice Langua

Navigate

CH1 CH2

ABC

CH3

Auto Scan

Manual Scan Carrier Setup

Common Interface

puteS egaugnaLunem niaM

Texd

Enter Exit

Texd

English

noitallatsnIunem niaM

Page 10

Language Setup/Auto Scan

Language Setup

Preparation:

Switch on appliance. Press TV/DVD to select the TV mode, then press ATV /D TV . The appliance switches over to DVB-T-mode. Menu languages supported are English, French, German, Italian, Spanish, Russian, Portuguese, Dutch, Polish, Swedish, Turkish, Finnish, Greek, Danish and Norwegian. (Welsh and Gaelic are available only for Digital Service Language.)

Auto Scan

Preparation:

Please ensure that all the connections have been made

Note:

•

If “FINLAND” is selected on the “AUTO INSTALLATION (COUNTRY)” screen, two languages are displayed for each item and the first selected language has priority. The language output depends on the languages contained in the broadcast.

•

All the channels will be deleted before the scanning process begins.

•

You can cancel the scan process at any time by pressing EXIT. The carriers and the services stored before EXIT is pressed will be stored.

•

When the signal from the broadcasting station is being updated and you are watching a digital broadcast, the channel will be automatically updated. The list of services screen will appear while updating, and the ‘Scan completed’ message will be shown after the update is complete.

DVB-T 16QAM

Auto Scan

:003

Radio

070 BBC Radio 1

001 BBC ONE 002 BBC TWO 007 BBC THREE

Information

Scan completed

Carrier :1

Frequency (kHz) :562000

Progress

Navigate

:001

Exit

correctly (see page 9).

2 3

Press DIGITAL MENU, the menu will appear on the screen. Press  or  to select Language Setup option, then press ENTER.

Language Setup menu will appear. Press  or  to select the item you want to change. Press  or  to select desired language.

When all changes are decided, press EXIT to return to the normal screen.

Press  or  to select ‘Auto Scan’ then press ENTER.

The confirmation banner will be displayed. Press  or  to select ‘Yes’ or ‘No’, then press ENTER.

The Auto Scan process will now begin. The scanning process will be displayed in the progress bar.

nem niaM

CH1 CH2

ABC

CH3

Language Setup

u La

nguage

Pref. Audio Language

Pref. Subtitle Language

Pref. Digital Service Lang

Navigate

unem niaM

CH1 CH2

ABC

CH3

Auto Scan

Manual Scan Carrier Setup

Auto Scan

DVB-T 16QAM

001 BBC ONE 002 BBC TWO 007 BBC THREE

Carrier :1

Frequency (kHz) :562000

Searching... Progress

:003

uage

Radio

070 BBC Radio 1

Navigate

Texd

English

Enter Exit

Texd

:001

Exit

Manual Scan/ Carrier Setup

Manual Scan

With the Manual Scan option, you can tune one carrier at a time, by entering the carrier parameters manually.

Press  or  to select ‘Manual Scan’, then press ENTER.

CH1 CH2

ABC

CH3

Auto Scan

Manual Scan

Channel list

Frequen

ABC

cy (kHz)

CH1 CH2 CH3

Carrier Setup

Navigate

Auto Scan Manual Scan

Carrier Setup

0..9

You can choose the carrier number from the Channel list by

puteS egaugnaL

noitallatsnI

Note:

•

If on the ‘AUTO INSTALLATION COUNTRY’ screen ‘FINLAND’ is selected, ‘Frequency (kHz)’ cannot be used.

•

When the Country is set to FINLAND in the ‘AUTO INSTALLATION COUNTRY’

If there is a Channel List in the data after Auto Scan or Manual Scan, Channel Type Selection Menu will be displayed and available to set Channel List Type. Select the Channel List Type by pressing / and press ENTER If “FINLAND” is selected on the

• “AUTO INSTALLATION COUNTRY” screen, Data is displayed on the “Carrier Setup” screen.

using  or  and the corresponding frequency set for the carrier will be set for tuning.

Otherwise you can also directly enter the frequency value to start the tuning.

After setting the carrier, press ENTER to start the scanning.

During the scan process, the list of services (TV/Radio) collected for the carrier will be listed.

Then the confirmation banner will be displayed.

Press  or  to select ‘Yes’ or ‘No’, then press ENTER.

Press EXIT to return to the normal screen.

Carrier Setup

The Carrier setup option menu lists all the carriers (multiplexes) that are currently available and allows you to Rename, Delete or Rescan carriers individually.

Press  or  to select ‘Carrier Setup’ then press ENTER.

All the carriers are listed with their frequency and service

information - the user can scroll through the carrier list and select each one individually to Rename, Delete or Rescan.

Rename:

Select carrier, then press Red button. The alphanumeric keypad will appear. You can rename a service as per your preference (see page 23).

Delete:

Select carrier, then press Green button. The check mark (

) will be displayed for selected carrier. Then press

ENTER. The confirmation banner will be displayed. Press  or  to select ‘Yes’ or ‘No’, then press ENTER. If the option ‘Yes’ is selected then all the marked carriers will be deleted from the list.

Rescan:

Rescan allows to tune the already tuned carrier, to collect any new programmes that are currently available in the stream. Press Blue button, to rescan the current selected carrier.

Texd

Ch-

474000

Enter Exit

Texd

noitallatsnIunem niaM

Channel Organizer

The Channel Organizer feature provides options to organise the channels. The following options are supported: Lock, Skip, Go To, Delete, Rename, Move, Change No., Move To.

Note:

•

While in TV mode, only TV programmes will be displayed and only radio programmes will be displayed while in radio mode. The displays of Channel / Service

• name will be abbreviated depend on its size of the letter.

Press  or  to select ‘Channel Organizer’, then press

ENTER.

CH1 CH2

ABC

CH3

Channel Organizer

The Channel Organizer menu will appear. The available

programmes will be listed, depending on the current mode. The selected programme will be highlighted. To toggle within the service list, press  or .

By pressing the corresponding Number Button (1-8), you

can activate the following functions from this menu for each channel: Lock, Skip, Go To, Delete, Rename, Move, Change No. and Move To. (You can deactivate each of these functions by pressing the same number again.) See page 23 for setting details.

rezinagrO lennahC

S.No Service Name Lock Skip Del Move

671 MNO 672 PQR 673 STU 674 TCM 679 VWXYZ 800 SAT.1 672 ARTE

1. Lock 4. Delete 7. Change No.

2. Skip 5. Rename 8. Move To

3. Go To 6. Move

0..9

D.Menu TV/RadioExit

Navigate

Indications:

S.No Service Name Lock Skip Del Move

030 CBBC

Service

Pay

number

name

channel

Locked service

Skipped service

Delete mark

Move mark

Channel Organizer

Setting details

rezina

grO lennahCunem niaM

Texd

Lock

Skip

Go To

Delete

Rename

Move

Change No. *

Move To *

Note:

* If on the “AUTO INSTALLATION(COUNTRY)” screen “UK” is selected, “Change No.” and “Move To” cannot

be used in U.K.

When the service is locked, you must enter your PIN whenever you tune to the service.

①

Press / to select the desired service.

②

Press 1 on the remote control. If you already set the PIN, enter it here. If not, enter the factory preset PIN “0000”. An icon displays indicating the service is locked.

•

Pressing 1 will turn the lock icon on and off. (PIN entry is required.)

③

Press DIGITAL MENU to save the setting.

Services that are set to skip will not be picked up when pressing CH

①

Press / to select the desired service.

②

Press 2 on the remote control. An icon displays indicating the service to be skipped.

••

Pressing 2 will turn the skip icon on and off.

③

Press DIGITAL MENU to save the setting.

To view services that are set to be skipped, use 0-9 or select from the Channel List.

Use this function to jump to the specific service in one step. This is useful when there are many services displayed on screen to scroll through.

①

Press 3 on the remote control. Now you can change the service number on the left side of the screen.

②

Enter the number using 0-9, and then press ENTER. The highlight moves to the

selected service.

Delete the selected service(s) from the memory.

①

Press / to select the desired service.

②

Press 4 on the remote control. An icon displays indicating the service to be deleted.

•

Pressing 4 will turn the delete icon on and off.

③

Press DIGITAL MENU to save the setting. A confirmation message displays.

④

Press / to select “Yes”, and then press ENTER.

Change individual service names.

①

Press / to select the desired service.

②

Press 5 on the remote control. A character set screen displays.

③

Press Yellow button to enter a new name for the service.

•

Press /// to move the cursor, then press ENTER to confirm the input of a character.

④

Press DIGITAL MENU to save the setting. A confirmation message displays.

⑤

Press / to select “Yes”, and then press ENTER.

Sort the order of the selected service by moving the service position.

①

Press / to select the desired service.

②

Press 6 on the remote control. An icon displays indicating the service to be moved.

•

Pressing 6 will turn the move icon on and off.

③

Move the selected service to the desired position using /, and then press ENTER

to register the change.

Change service number.

①

Press C/D to select the desired service.

②

Press 7 on the remote control. Now you can change the service number on the left

side of the screen.

③

Enter the number using 0-9, and then press ENTER.

You cannot enter the same service number with other one.•

Sort the order of the selected service by modifying the service number.

①

Press / to select the desired service.

②

Press 8 on the remote control. Now you can change the service number on the left

side of the screen.

③

Enter the number using 0-9, and then press ENTER. The service moves to the new

position.

/ .

Page 11

Display Setup/Time Setup

Display Setup

Time Setup

If the time displayed on the Channel banner differs from the actual time, it can be corrected.

Press  or  to select ‘Display Setup’, then press ENTER.

Main menu System Configuration

CH1 CH2

ABC

CH3

Display Setup menu will appear. Press  or  to select the item you want to change. Then you can change each setting by pressing  or .

Banner

1 sec, 2 sec.….

timeout

7 sec.

Banner

Top Select whether the ser vice

position

Bottom

After all the changes are made, press EXIT to return to the normal screen.

Select how long the service banner information appears on screen.

banner information appears on top or bottom of the screen.

Display Setup

Time Setup P

assword Setup

Subtitle

Texd

Press  or  to select ‘Time Setup’, then press ENTER.

Main menu System Configuration

CH1 CH2

ABC

CH3

Time Setup menu will appear. If the time displayed on the Channel banner differs from the actual time, adjust the time offset with the  or  button until the correct time is shown.

Note:

Normally, this would be done by selecting “Auto”.•

After all the changes are made, press EXIT to return to the normal screen.

Display Setup

Time Setup

assword Setup

Subtitle

Texd

Note:

•

There are 15 age-based ratings, ranging from ‘4’ (years old) to ‘18’ (years old) and ‘None’. Eg. If the Parental Lock is set to ‘8’ (years old), only the services which have the parental rating of ‘8’ (years old) or under will be viewable without entering the Password.

•

You will be prompted to enter the password, when you set new parental rating. You can set the new parental rating only when you enter the password correctly, otherwise the old parental code will be retained.

Password Setup (Parental lock)

This feature allows you to have a parental control of the service viewing as per your preference. Once a service is protected with a password, it cannot be viewed unless the correct password is provided.

Press  or  to select ‘Password Setup’, then press

ENTER.

‘Enter Password’ will appear. Press ‘0 0 0 0’ using the

Number Buttons. (This is the default password.)

Press  or  to select ‘Parental Lock’, then press  or  to

select desired parental rating (see note). Then press EXIT to return to the normal screen.

You can also change the password using the next option.

Press  or  to select ‘Change password’.

Then enter your chosen new password (0 to 9), be sure to remember this password. After you have entered the new password for the first time, you need to enter the same password again for confirmation. The Information banner will then appear.

Press EXIT to return to the normal screen.

While toggling between channels, if a service which has a parental rating is selected then you will be asked to enter the correct password to view that channel. If the channel you are currently watching supports a parental rating then the rating will also be displayed in the Channel banner menu (see page 27).

IMPORTANT NOTE ON RESETTING THE PASSWORD

We suggest that you remove the following instruction from the operating instructions to prevent children from reading it.

If you forget your password, follow steps below to reset the password.

1. Press ATV/DTV to select the digital TV mode.

2. Press MENU to display the analogue menu, then

press  or  to select

3. Press The password is reset to ‘0000’.

Main menu System Configuration

CH1 CH2

ABC

CH3

4 times within 5 seconds.

(SETUP).

Display Setup Time Setup

assword Setup

Subtitle

Texd

Version/Software Upgrade/Common Interface

Version

You can check the software and hardware versions.

Note:

Do not disconnect the AC cord when

• the software upgrade is in progress, as this may cause the upgrade to fail. At this time you cannot use any of the buttons. When the unit searches for a software

• upgrade signal, the message ‘Please wait...’ will be displayed.

Press  or  to

select ‘Version’, then press ENTER. The hardware and software versions are displayed.

Press EXIT to return to the normal screen.

Software Upgrade

Software Upgrade allows you to download the latest software available on the Engineering channel.

Manual upgrade

Press  or  to

select ‘Software upgrade’, then press ENTER.

If a software upgrade is available from an Over Air

Download (OAD) then the message ‘S/W available, do you want to download?’ will be displayed - you can then select ‘Yes’ or ‘No’ by pressing  or , then press ENTER.

If you select the option ‘Yes’ then the Software Upgrade

process will be initiated. It will take about 20 minutes and after this process is complete, the TV will be rebooted automatically.

If you select the option ‘No’ you can continue to watch TV programmes as before.

Auto upgrade

When you tune to the service that provides the upgrade via

Over Air Download, a confirmation message displays.

Follow the screen prompts.

Common Interface

You can access the Common Interface module information from this menu option.

Preparations

Insert CAM into the DVB Common Interface slot on the backside of the TV (see page 9).

Press  or  to

select ‘Common Interface’, then press ENTER.

The CAM module name will be displayed. You have to press

ENTER to view further information.

In the CI Menu, CAM specific information such as Module

information, Smart card information, Language and Software Download are shown. Press  or  to select information, then press ENTER to see detail.

Press EXIT to return to the normal screen.

Main menu Technical Information

CH1 CH2

ABC

CH3

Main menu Technical Information

CH1 CH2

ABC

CH3

CH1 CH2

ABC

CH3

Texd

Version

Software upgrade

Texd

Vers ion

Software upgrade

Texd

Common Interface

Channel list/Channel banner

Channel list

Press CH LIST to display the Channel list menu.

ecafretnI nommoCunem niaM

Note:

•

Channel / Service names can only be displayed up to about 16 characters

- if the name is longer than this, it will be abbreviated. The Basic Service Information screen (Step 2) displays the full Channel/Service names, not the abbreviated names. Subtitles are displayed on the

• channel banner. Some broadcasts may not provide this service.

S.No Services

671 MNO 672 PQR 673 STU

List of the

674 TCM

services

679 VWXYZ 800 SAT.1

Select the Services:

List of the services present under the selected Channel group will be displayed in the left side of the menu. Press  or  to toggle within the service list, then press

ENTER.

Toggle between the list of TV and Radio services:

The TV/RADIO is used to toggle between the TV and Radio mode. If you press CH LIST when you are in Radio mode then the channel list menu will display the list of Radio services. If you wish to view the list of TV services without exiting the current menu, TV/RADIO should be pressed once.

Channel banner

When you change from one channel to another, the Channel banner will be displayed for the selected service. In the channel banner menu, information such as current date & time, channel name, etc. will be displayed.

While watching the service, press to display the Channel

banner at any time. It will disappear after the Banner timeout value (this can be adjusted to your preferred value, see page 24).

Service name

Service No.

Duration graph

Undefined

Genre

Starting time/Ending time of current programme

Press again to display the

Basic Service Information. You can verify the signal strength and quality of the selected service here. If necessary, adjust the direction of the antenna to obtain the maximum signal strength.

•

When the Country setting has been set to FINLAND,

once more to display the advanced detailed

press information.

To remove the Channel banner immediately, press

DVB Teletext available

DVB Subtitle available

Lock status

Pay TV

Audio mode

251_ABC_Monosco_0... 17:17:37

Programme name

Parental rating

Basic Service Information DVB-T 64QAM

671 M

ervice Name

ignal Quality

ignal S

rength

671_MNO_10Step_0820_0005_0030_Audio2_AB...

671_MNO_10Step_0820_0005_0030_Audio2_A

DEF

GHIJKLMNOPQRSTU

opqr

stuvwxyz

Enter Exit

Navigate

01:egA

oeretSENO CBB 100

7002/80/0283:7180:71

Enter TV/RadioExit

Time and date

YZabcdefghijklmn

again.

VT tsil lennahC

65%

63%

Page 12

Multi audio/DVB-Subtitle/Using the Digital Service (UK only)

Multi audio

You can select your preferred Audio mode and DVB (digital TV) subtitle Language. The Multi audio menu will display the Audio mode and Language options available with the current broadcast.

Press AUDIO SELECT to display the Multi audio menu.

The Audio mode and Language code will be displayed if

Note:

•

Dolby Digital audio can be selected for some language options. There is no sound output from the main unit’s speakers when Dolby Digital audio is selected. You can only hear Dolby Digital audio through the amplifier equipped with a Dolby Digital decorder. DVB-Subtitle can also be changed by

•

pressing of SUBTITLE repeatedly.

available.

To select Audio mode, press  or . In general the below

audio modes will be supported in a service. Stereo, Left, Right and L + R.

To select a Language code, press  or  to select code within Language code list.

When completely different audio tracks are being broadcast

• from the left and right channels, select Left or Right.

Press EXIT. Your selected audio preferences will be saved.

DVB-Subtitle

DVB-Subtitle is a feature supported in DVB (Digital Video Broadcasting) applications in which the service shown can be accompanied by a text display on the screen in parallel with the corresponding audio service. The DVB-Subtitle feature can be enabled or disabled at anytime.

Press  or  to select “Subtitle”, then press ENTER.

Press  or  to select your desired subtitle language from

the available languages.

To turn off the DVB-Subtitle, press  or  repeatedly until

‘Off’ appears in the Subtitle menu. Press EXIT. Your selected subtitle language will be saved.

Using the Digital Service (UK only)

Some services bring you programmes with the Digital Service, letting you experience DTV interactively. When provided, the Digital Service will start when you press

Note:

When you display the DVB-Subtitle, Digital Service screen

• cannot display. If you want display the Digital Service, setting the DVB-Subtitle to Off.

Multi audio

Audio mode

No. Language Code

001 ENG

Multi audio

Audio mode

No. Language Code

001 ENG

Main menu System Configuration

CH1 CH2

ABC

CH3

Subtitle

egaugnaL

Navigate

Display Setup Time Setup Password Setup

Subtitle

Enter Exit

Texd

English

EPG (Electronic Program Guide)

The Guide menu shows the available programme listings for the next 8 days only, including today. However, the guide menu will show ‘No Event Name’ for programmes which are more than 8 days ahead, or for programmes within the 8 days when no programme information is

Stereo

L+R

available.

Press GUIDE to display the Guide menu.

Service list :

Lists all the services that are currently available. As you scroll through the service list by pressing  or , the Event list will be refreshed accordingly, and you will see the programme information for the currently highlighted programme. To scroll through the service list page by page, press Red or Green button.

Events list :

List the events in a grid of rows and columns. Each row shows the list of events that are available, for the corresponding service in the service list. Within each row, you can press  or  to navigate through the rest of the events. You can easily move to the Previous day or Next day in the Events List by pressing Yellow or Blue button (the date of the programme information you are currently viewing is shown in the top right hand corner).

The full Event name along with the duration of the event will be displayed in the bar above. Event title will be displayed only if available otherwise ‘No Description’ message will be displayed.

From within the Guide menu, you can open the Description

menu for the currently highlighted programme by pressing

The Guide/Description menu shows the extended event description of an event. You can scroll and view the complete event description of the event using  or .

To return to the Guide menu, press To clear the menu screen, press EXIT.

Guide 16:50 Sun 20/08/2008 TV

671_MNO_10Step_0820_0100_0120_Audio2_0100_0120...

MNO PQS STU TCM

Service list

VWXYZ SAT.1 ARTE DEF

671_MNO_10step

671_M...

672_PQR_SMPTE_col...

Enter Exit Guide

View Info

02:0001:30

01:00Channels

671_M... 672_PQR_SMPTE_col... 673_STU_SDTV... 673_STU_SDTV Moving... No Event Name 679_VWXYZ_Monosoo_0100_0300... No Event Name No Event Name No Event Name

Page - Pag e + Prev.Day Next Day

Navigate

Highlighted programme

8002/80/02nuS671 MNO

Events list

TV/Radio

EPG Timer

You can choose whether or not the screen switches on when the timer event begins - please see page 18 (Rec screen status (LCD Power on/off)). This is so that if you are using the timer to make a recording to your VCR or other device, the TV screen will not switch on unless you want it to. If you try to switch to another channel while a timer event is in progress, the following message will appear: ‘WARNING: CHANGING THE CHANNEL WILL INTERRUPT YOUR EVENT TIMER. ARE YOU SURE YOU WANT TO PROCEED? YES/NO’. Select Yes or No according to your wishes.

Press GUIDE to display the Guide menu. Then press

/// to highlight the programme you want to set as a

Note:

•

When the EPG Timer starts, the message “Event Timer Started” will appear.

•

A maximum of eight Timers can be programmed.

•

If the EPG Timer starts when it is already switched on, it will start at the exact time that is set. If it starts from the standby mode, it will begin 20 seconds in advance of the stated time. You cannot hasten the start time from

• the original start time of the Event. You cannot set with the same date

• and time of another Event. Press the Yellow

• the start time of the event.

•

Press the Blue time duration of the event.

•

If the EPG Timer begins during standby mode, the indicator on the unit will be lit in orange. This is to indicate that an EPG Timer event has begun in standby mode.

•

When in power-off-condition, EPG Timer cannot be activated.

button

to change

to change the

(Power)

timer event, then press ENTER.

Note:

•

If you select an event which has already started, the selected program will be displayed on the screen, as you cannot set the timer for a programme which has already started.

•

To display the stored timer events, press GUIDE twice. The Event Timer menu (see step 3 below) will appear. You can also delete or change the frequency (Once / Daily / Weekly) of the stored timer events (but please note that you cannot edit the time details that have been set from the EPG).

The confirmation banner will be displayed.

Press  or  to select ‘Yes’ or ‘No’, then press ENTER (the selected option is shown in blue).

The Event Timer menu will appear.

Press the Red button to set the Timer mode for a selected event.

The Timer mode

specifies the frequency of Timer wake-up which can be set as Once, Daily or Weekly. Press ENTER to save the selected Timer mode.

Note:

To delete a timer event, select the specified event, then press the Green

To return to the Guide menu, press DIGITAL MENU.

To clear the menu screen, press EXIT.

Guide 16:50 Sun 20/08/2008 TV

671_MNO_10Step_0820_0100_0120_Audio2_0100_0120...

01:00Channels

671_M...

MNO

672_PQR_SMPTE_col...

PQS

673_STU_SDTV... 673_STU_SDTV Moving...

STU TCM

No Event Name

VWXYZ

679_VWXYZ_Monosoo_0100_0300...

SAT.1

No Event Name No Event Name

ARTE

No Event Name

DEF

Page - Page + Prev.Day Next Day

Navigate

Event Timer

Service Name Mode Date Time Duration BBC ONE Once 26/02/08 08:10 00:23

Timer mode Edit Timer Edit Duration

Navigate

Event Timer

Service Name Mode Date BBC ONE Once 26/02

Once Daily Weekly

button

671_M...

Enter Exit Guide

View Info

Delete Timer

02:0001:30

671_MNO_10step

672_PQR_SMPTE_col...

Enter Exit

Disc

DVD discs must be Region 2 or Region ALL type to play on this unit. The suitable disc formats are: DVD-Video, DVD-R/-RW (Video format only), Audio CD, CD-R/CD-RW and Video CD. Some CD-R/RW discs may be incompatible.

•

This unit can play an 8cm disc. Please do not use a disc adapter. It may cause trouble.

•

Please do not insert any disc of an irregular shape into the unit, as it may interfere with the function of the unit.

You may not be able to remove it.

•

Please do not use after market accessories, such as a ring protector, as this may cause trouble with the operation of the unit.

Do not play DVD-ROM, DVD-Audio, CD-G, Photo CD or SVCD to prevent accidental erasure of prerecorded

8002/80/02 nuS 671 MNO

TV/Radio

material.

Title

When two or more movies are recorded on a disc, the disc is divided into two or more sections. Each section is called a “TITLE”.

Chapter

The titles can be subdivided into many sections. Each section is called a “CHAPTER”.

Track

Video CD/Audio CD can contain several items. These are assigned to tracks.

Removing Disc from Case

Be sure to hold the edge of disc. Do not touch the surface of the disc. Pick up the disc gently from the case.

•

Do not scratch the disc.

•

Do not get dirt on the surface of the disc.

•

Do not stick a label or adhesive tape on the disc.

•

Do not drop or bend the disc.

Storing Disc

•

Store the disc in the case to avoid risk of scratches, dirt or damage.

•

Do not leave disc exposed to direct sunlight or in hot or humid places.

Cleaning Disc

Wipe the disc with a clean, dry cloth from center to edge.

•

Do not wipe in circular direction.

•

Do not use liquid or aerosol cleaners.

On Video CDs

This unit supports Video CDs equipped with the PBC (Version 2.0) function. (PBC is the abbreviation of Playback Control.) You can enjoy two playback variations depending on types of discs.

•

Video CD not equipped with PBC function (Version 1.1) Sound and movie can be played on this TV/DVD in the same way as an audio CD.

•

Video CD equipped with PBC function (Version 2.0) In addition to operation of a Video CD not equipped with the PBC function, you can enjoy playback of interactive software with search function by using the menu displayed on the TV screen (Menu Playback). Some of the functions described in this owner’s manual may not work with some discs.

To turn off the PBC

Press PLAY MODE in the Stop mode. Press / to select “Mode”, then press ENTER repeatedly until “Off” appears.

Press PLAY MODE again to clear the screen.

To turn on the PBC

Follow the above step 1~2, then press ENTER repeatedly until “PBC” appear.

CHAPTER 1

TRACK 1 TRACK 2 TRACK 3 TRACK 4 TRACK 5

DVD DISC

TITLE1 TITLE2

CHAPTER 2 CHAPTER 2 CHAPTER 3CHAPTER 1

Video-CD/Audio-CD

Page 13

Playing a disc

Note:

•

If the unit does not operate properly:

Static electricity, etc., may affect the player’s operation. Disconnect the AC power cord once, then connect it again. If a disc is inserted during some modes

• other than DVD mode, it may switch to DVD mode and then playback may be begun automatically.

About inserting disc:

•

If the unit is slanted or moved while inserting disc, the disc may get damage.

This section shows you the basics on how to play a disc.

Basic playback (DVD/VCD/Audio CD)

Preparation

on the unit.

Press

Press TV/DVD on the remote control to select the DVD

mode.

Place the disc in the

disc slot with the label side facing forward. (If the disc has a label.)

Do not place a disc which is unplayable in this unit.•

On the TV-screen, “ ” changes to “Reading” and then

playback commences.

A menu screen will appear on the TV screen if the disc

• has a menu feature. Press /// to select title, then press ENTER.

• Title is selected and play commences.

Press to end playback.

The unit records the stopped point, depending on the

• disc. “

” appears on the screen. Press resume playback (from the scene point). If you press again (“ ” appears on the screen.), the

• unit will clear the stopped point.

To start playback in the stop mode Press PLAY (

Reading

PLAY

( ) to

Playing a disc

To pause playback (still mode)

Press

during playback.

To resume normal playback, press PLAY (

The sound is muted during still mode.

•

To stop playback

Press .

To remove the disc

Press

Remove the disc after the disc comes out.

Note:

If a non-compatible disc is loaded, “Incorrect Disc”, “Region

• Code Error” or “Parental Error” will appear on the TV screen according to the type of loaded disc. In this case, check your disc again (see pages 31 and 50). Some discs may take a minute or so to start playback.

• When you set a single-faced disc label backwards (i.e.

• the wrong way), “Reading” will appear on the display for a few minutes and then “Incorrect Disc” will continue to be displayed. Some discs may not work the resuming facility.

• Resuming cannot function when you play a PBC-featured

• Video CD while the PBC is on. To turn off the PBC, see page

31. Some playback operations of DVDs may be intentionally fixed

• by software producers. Since this unit plays DVDs according to the disc contents the software producers designed, some playback features may not be available. Also refer to the instructions supplied with the DVDs. Do not move the unit during playback. Doing so may damage

• the disc. In many instances, a menu screen will appear after playback

• of a movie is completed. Prolonged display of an on-screen menu may damage your television set, permanently etching that image onto its screen. To avoid this, be sure to press on your remote control once the movie is completed.

•

There may be a slight delay between the button is pressed and the function activates.

Playing a disc

Note:

•

A prohibition symbol “ at the upper right of the screen. This symbol means either the feature you tried is not available on the disc, or the unit cannot access the feature at this time. This does not indicate a problem with the unit.

” may appear

You can play discs at various speeds.

Playing in fast reverse or fast forward directions (DVD/ VCD/Audio CD)

Press

or during playback. : Fast reverse playback : Fast forward playback

Each time you press

To resume normal playback Press PLAY (

Note:

•

The unit mutes sound during reverse and forward scan of DVD/VCD discs.

•

The playback speed may differ depending on the disc. You can use fast reverse/fast forward playback for mp3/DivX

• CD.

Playing frame by frame (DVD/VCD)

Press

during still playback.

Each time you press

To resume normal playback Press PLAY (

Note:

•

You can use frame by frame playback for DivX The sound is muted during frame by frame playback.

•

Playing in slow-motion (DVD/VCD)

Press

or during playback.

Each time you press

To resume normal playback Press PLAY (

Note:

•

The sound is muted during slow-motion playback.

•

You can use slow motion playback for DivX

•

Reverse slow (

Locating a chapter or track (DVD/VCD/Audio CD)

Press SKIP number you want. Playback starts from the selected chapter or track.

To locate succeeding chapters or tracks, press SKIP Playback starts from the beginning of the succeeding chapter or track. To locate the preceding chapter or track, press SKIP in quick succession. Playback starts from the beginning of the preceding chapter or track.

or , the playback speed changes.

, the picture advances one frame.

CD.

or , the slow-motion speed changes.

) does not work on VCD and DivX® CD.

or repeatedly to display the chapter or track

CD.

twice

Zooming/Locating desired scene

Zooming (DVD/VCD)

This unit will allow you to zoom in the frame image. You can then make selections by switching the position of the frame.

Press ZOOM during playback.

The centre part of the image will be zoomed in. Each press of ZOOM will change the ZOOM (x 1.5) and 3 (x 2.0).

Press /// to view a different part of the frame.

You may move the frame from the centre position to UP, DOWN, LEFT or RIGHT direction.

In the zoom mode, press ZOOM repeatedly to return to a

Locating desired scene (DVD/VCD/Audio CD)

Use the title, chapter and time recorded on the DVD disc to locate the desired point to playback. In the case of VCD/Audio CD discs, time and track are used to locate the desired point to playback. To check the title, chapter/track and time, press .

Off).

1:1 view (

Note:

•

You can select the Pause or Slow in the zoom mode.

•

Some discs may not respond to zoom feature.

•

Zoom function can be used for DivX

Press JUMP during playback or resume stop mode.

Press  or  to select the “Title/Track”, “Chapter” or “Time”.

Press Number buttons (0–9) to input the number.

If you input a wrong number,

•

press CANCEL. Refer to the package

• supplied with the disc to check the numbers.

Press ENTER. Playback starts.

•

When you change the title, playback starts from Chapter 1 of the selected title.

•

Some discs may not work in the above operation.

Note:

•

In case of the Audio CD and Video-CD, only Track and Time can be selected.

•

In case of the Video-CD playback with PBC, the JUMP does not work. Turn off the PBC (see page 31).

•

Only Time search function can be used for DivX

Title Chapter Time

Title Chapter 12 Time

CD.

1(x 1.3), 2

Jump

CD.

Page 14

Marking desired scenes

Note:

Some discs may not work with the

• marking operation. The marking is cancelled when you

• eject the disc or turn the power off. Some subtitles recorded around the

• marker may fail to appear. In case of Video CD with PBC,

• Marker function is prohibited. Marker function does not work with

• MP3/JPEG CD/DivX

CD.

Marking the scenes (DVD/VCD/Audio CD)

The unit stores the points that you want to watch again up to 3 points. You can resume playback from each scene.

Press MARKER during

playback.

Select the blank Marker using

 or . Then press ENTER at the desired scene.

Repeat this procedure to set the other 2 scenes.•

Press MARKER to clear this display.

Marker 1 Marker 2 Marker 3

2700 54

Returning to the scenes (DVD/VCD/Audio CD)

Press MARKER during

playback or stop mode.

Press  or  to select the

Marker 1-3.

Press ENTER.

Playback starts from the marked scene.

To cancel the Marker

Follow the above steps 1~2, then press CANCEL.

Marker 1 Marker 2 Marker 3

2700 54

160825

00 01

Repeat playback/A-B Repeat playback

Repeat playback (DVD/VCD)

Press PLAY MODE during playback or stop mode.

Press ENTER repeatedly to

select “Chapter” or “Title”.

The unit automatically starts repeat playback after finishing the current title or chapter.

[Video CD]

Press  to select “Repeat”. Press ENTER to select “Track” or “All”.

If you set the repeat mode during stop mode, press PLAY

•

(

) to start Repeat playback.

Press PLAY MODE again to clear the screen.

To resume normal playback

Select Repeat : “Off” in step 2.

Note:

Some discs may not work with the repeat operation.

• In case of Video CD with PBC, Repeat functions are

54 25 31

• prohibited during playback. Chapter repeat function is cancelled whenever

•

SKIP (

) or SKIP ( ) is pressed.

A-B Repeat playback (DVD/VCD/Audio CD)

A-B repeat playback allows you to repeat selection between two selected points.

Press REPEAT A-B during

playback. The start point is selected.

Press REPEAT A-B again.

The end point is selected. Playback starts at the point that you selected. Playback stops at the end point and returns to Point A automatically, then starts again.

To resume normal playback

Press REPEAT A-B again.

Off

“

” appears on the screen.

Note:

•

In A-B Repeat mode, subtitles near the A or B locations may not be displayed.

•

You may not be able to set A-B Repeat for the scenes that include multiple angles.

•

A-B Repeat playback does not work when Repeat playback is activated.

•

You may not be able to set A-B Repeat during certain scenes of the DVD.

•

A-B Repeat does not work with an interactive DVD and MP3/JPEG CD.

•

In case of Video CD with PBC, A-B Repeat is prohibited.

Play Mode

Repeat : Off

Changing angles/Title selection/DVD menu

Changing angles (DVD)

When playing back a disc recorded with multi-angle facility, you can change the angle that you are viewing the scene from.

Press ANGLE during

playback. The current angle will appear.

Press ANGLE repeatedly until the desired angle is

selected.

Note:

Depending on the DVD, you may not be able to change

• the angles even if multi-angles are recorded on the DVD.

Title selection (DVD)

Two or more titles are recorded on some discs. If the title menu is recorded on the disc, you can select the desired title.

Press TOP MENU during playback.

Title menu appears on the screen.

Press /// to select the desired title.

Press ENTER or PLAY ( ).

The playback of the selected title will start.

Note:

Depending on the DVD, you may not be able to select the title. Depending on the DVD, a “title menu” may simply be called a “menu” or “title” in the instructions supplied with the disc.

DVD menu (DVD)

Some DVDs allow you to select the disc contents using the menu. When you playback these DVDs, you can select the subtitle language, soundtrack language, etc, using the menu.

Press DVD MENU during playback.

The DVD menu appears on the screen.

Press DVD MENU again to resume playback at the scene

• when you pressed DVD MENU.

Press /// to select the desired item.

Press ENTER.

The menu continues to another screen. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to set the item completely.

Note:

Depending on the DVD, you may not be able to resume

• playback from the scene point when you press DVD

MENU.

Changing soundtrack language/Subtitles/Disc status

Changing Soundtrack Language (DVD/VCD)

You can select the language when you play a multilingual disc.

Press AUDIO SELECT during

1/2

Note:

•

If the desired language is not heard after pressing the button several times, the language is not recorded on the disc.

•

The selected soundtrack language is cancelled when you eject the disc. The initial default language or available language will be heard if the disc is played back again.

•

Depending on the DVD, you may not be able to change subtitles, or to turn subtitles on or off.

•

While playing a DVD, the subtitle may change when you loaded or eject the disc.

•

In some cases, a selected subtitle language may not be changed immediately.

playback. The current soundtrack language will appear.

Press AUDIO SELECT repeatedly

until the desired language is selected.

The on screen display will

• disappear after a few seconds.

In case of Video CD playback

Audio type changes as follows each time you press AUDIO SELECT.

LR L R

Subtitles (DVD)

When playing back a disc recorded with subtitles, you can select the subtitle language or turn the subtitle off.

Press SUBTITLE repeatedly during

playback until the desired language is selected.

To turn off the subtitle, press

SUBTITLE until “Off” appears.

The on screen display will

• disappear after a few seconds.

Disc status (DVD/VCD)

With press of , the status of the disc will appear on the screen. To cancel the display, press

[DVD]

DISC OPERATION

TITLE NO.

DVD 00:15:25 01:41:39 Title 1/3 Chapter 2/24 1/1 Eng Dolby Digital 1/2 Eng 1/1

ANGLE NO.

AUDIO LANGUAGE A KIND OF AUDIO

[Video CD]

DISC OPERATION

VCD 00:08:32 00:51:03 Track 3/15

TRACK NO.

again.

ELAPSED TIME

SUBTITLE LANGUAGE

ELAPSED TIME

TOTAL TIME

1/2 Eng Dolby Digital

2/2 Fre Dolby Digital

1/5 Eng

Off

CHAPTER NO.

Page 15

MP3/JPEG/DivX® and Audio CD operation

This unit can playback the MP3/JPEG/DivX®-data which has been recorded on CD-R/RW. Audio CD also can be played back. To produce the MP3/JPEG/DivX and a MP3/JPEG/DivX This unit requires discs/recordings to meet certain technical standards in order to achieve optimal playback quality. There are many different types of recordable disc formats (including CD-R containing MP3 files). Not all recordable discs will produce optimal playback quality. The technical criteria set forth in this instruction manual are meant only as a guide. Use of CD-RW for MP3 files is not recommended.

MP3/JPEG/DivX® - data information

Limitations on MP3/JPEG/DivX® playback

MP3/JPEG/DivX

• “.mp3”, “.jpg”, “div”, “divx”, “avi”.

•

MP3/JPEG/DivX

•

This unit can read 2000 files per disc. If one disc has more than 2000 files, it reads up to 2000 files, the remaining files will be omitted. MP3/JPEG/DivX

•

It may take more than one minute for this unit to read MP3/JPEG/DivX Music recorded by “Joliet Recording Specification” can be played back.

•

The music files recorded by “Hierarchical File System” (HFS) cannot be played.

Limitations on displaying of the file name.

The maximum number for display is 15 characters. Long file names will be condensed.

•

Available characters for display are the following: capital or small alphabets of A through Z, numbers of 0 through 9, and _ (under score).

•

Other characters than those above are replaced in hyphen.

To playback MP3/JPEG/DivX

Use MP3/JPEG/DivX

Insert two or three digit number in the head of file name. (ex. “01” “02” or “001” “002”).

Refrain from making too many sub-folders.

CAUTION:

•

Some MP3/JPEG/DivX

•

The CD-R/RW that has no music data or non MP3/JPEG/DivX

Standard sampling frequency and the bit rate:

MP3

MPEG-1 Audio 32kHz, 44.1kHz, 48kHz 32kbps ~ 320kbps (constant bit rate or variable bit rate) The recommend recording setting for a high-quality sound is 44.1kHz of sampling frequency and 128kbps of constant bit rate.

DivX

video

DivX

version: DivX® 3, 4, 5, and 6 (specifically 3.1.1, 4.1.2, 5.0.2, 5.0.5, 5.1.1, 5.2.1, 6.0 at Home

Theater profile).

Audio format: MPEG1 Layer2 (MP2), MPEG1 Layer3 (MP3) Sampling frequencies: 32kHz, 44.1kHz, 48kHz Bit rate: 32kbps ~ 320kbps Resolution: Max 720 x 576 (at 25fps), Max 720 x 480 (at 30fps)

-encoding Software (not supplied). The Apple-HFS-System cannot be played.

CD are standardized by ISO9660, its file name must include following extensions;

CD must be corresponded to the ISO standardized files.

CDs cannot be used for the purpose of recording on this unit.

CD in the recorded order.

software that records data alphabetically or numerically.

CDs cannot be played back depending on the recording conditions.

-data, you need a Windows-PC with CD-RW drive

files depending on its structure.

files cannot be played back.

MP3/JPEG/DivX® and Audio CD operation

Note:

During MP3/JPEG-Playback, you

• cannot use JUMP and A-B Repeat functions. You can use Repeat (Track or All),

• Random functions and Program playback for MP3/JPEG/DivX Playback (See pages 44, 45)

Loading CD

Load a MP3/JPEG/DivX® CD or an Audio CD into the disc slot.

A file browser screen will appear on the screen.

•

In case the current directory includes 9 files or more, press  or  to scroll in the file list.

•

To see contents in folder, select the folder and then press ENTER. To return to the parent directory, select “ Up ...” then press ENTER.

•

In case of a CD containing a mixture of MP3, JPEG and

DivX

files, the files are played back by selecting them

from the file browser.

Operation status

File list

/MP3-5.MP3

MP3-5

MP3-6 MP3-7 MP3-8 Picture-1 Picture-2 Movie-1 Movie-2

File number

1/15 00:00:00

Elapsed time

Select Files

Repeat :Off

Mode :Off

Music Playing

Preview windowCursor

Selected file name

MP3 and Audio CD playback

In the file browser, press / to select the desired file.

When PLAY ( displaying file browser displayed, playback begins automatically starting from the first file. In this case, if the first file is an MP3 file, only MP3 files are played back in order. If the first file is a JPEG file, the first JPEG file is played back. If the first file is a DivX played back. If there is no file at a root directory, playback does not begin automatically.

Press ENTER.

The selected file starts playing back.

Press to end playback.

•

Select Files

The file type to make it display in the file browser can be chosen.

Press  or  to select “Select Files” at right column in the file browser.(“Select Files” is not applicable to Audio CD.)

Press ENTER, then press  or  to select file type from the list (Music, Picture or Movie).

Press ENTER to add/remove check mark. Checked file type

will be displayed in the file browser.

Press RETURN to save the setting.

) is pressed after

file, the first DivX® file is

The unit records the stopped point. “ screen. Press PLAY ( scene point). If you press the stopped point.

) to resume playback (from the

again or unload the disc, the unit will clear

Tool kit window

File type

: Indicates Music file

(Audio CD/MP3)

: Indicates Picture file

(JPEG)

: Indicates Movie file

video)

(DivX

/MP3-2.MP3

Folder-1 Folder-2 MP3-1

MP3-2

MP3-3 MP3-4 MP3-5 MP3-6

” appears on the

Select Files

Repeat :Off

Mode :Off

JPEG Preview

MP3/JPEG/Divx® and Audio CD operation

JPEG playback

In the file browser, press / to select the desired JPEG

file. To display a thumbnail list, press DVD MENU. Press /// to select the desired file.

Note:

•

During JPEG playback, you cannot use Jump and A-B Repeat functions.

•

When an image exceeds 5760 x 3840 pixels, the entire image (preview window or thumbnail list) may not be displayed on a screen.

•

It may have a longer interval due to the size of data.

(To return to the file browser, press TOP MENU.)

When PLAY ( after displaying the file browser, playback begins automatically starting from the first file. In this case, if the first file is a JPEG file, the first JPEG file is played back.

If the first file is an MP3 file, only MP3 files are played back in order. If the first file is a DivX played back. If there is no file at a root directory, playback does not begin automatically.

Press ENTER. The selected picture appears on the screen.

Rotating an image

You can rotate an image by 90 degrees. Press ANGLE during playback of the image. “

Zooming an image

Zoom function also can be used in viewing JPEG files. Press ZOOM (See “Zooming” on page 35).

Press to end playback.

The file browser appears on the screen. If you want to watch the other file, repeat steps 1 ~ 2.

Slide show playback

The slide show enables you to view pictures (files) one after another automatically.

Preparation

Set “JPEG Interval” setting to “Off”, “5 Seconds”, “10 Seconds” or “15 Seconds” (See page 49).

Select your desired starting file for the slide show in step 1

above.

Press ENTER or PLAY ( ) to start slide show from the

selected file.

•

) is pressed

”, “ ”, “ ” or “ ” appears on the screen.

If you press

during the slide show, the slide show stops ” appears briefly on the screen.

temporary. “ Press PLAY ( show. If the picture appears upside down or sideways, press ANGLE repeatedly until it’s right side up. “ ”, “ ”,

“ When the slide show playback finished, the file list appears. To stop the slide show, press . The file list appears.

) or SKIP ( ) again to resume the slide

” or “ ” appears on the screen.

/Picture-01.JPG

Picture-01

Repeat :Off

Picture-02 Picture-03

Mode :Off

Picture-04 Picture-05 Picture-06 Picture-07 Picture-08

file, the first DivX® file is

Select Files

JPEG Preview

W: 2048 H: 1536

MP3/JPEG/Divx® and Audio CD operation

Note:

•

In order to play DivX on this unit, you first need to register the unit with registration code. See page 50.

•

Depending on the recording conditions of DivX be able to use fast reverse/forward playback or JUMP function.See pages 34, 35.

VOD content

file, you may not

DivX® playback

In the file browser, press

/ to select the desired file.

When PLAY ( ) has been pressed after the file browser displayed, playback begins automatically starting from the first file. In this case, if the first file is a JPEG file, the first JPEG file is played back. If the first

file, the first DivX® file is played back. If the first

file is a DivX file is an MP3 file, only MP3 file are played back in order. If there is no file at a root directory, playback does not begin automatically.

Press ENTER or PLAY ( ). The selected DivX® movie will

be played back on the TV screen.

Press STOP ( ) to end playback.

•

The unit records the stopped point. “ TV screen. Press PLAY ( the scene point).

•

If you press STOP ( will clear the stopped point. To watch the other file, repeat steps 1 ~ 2.

Playing DivX® VOD content

DivX® VOD content is protected by DRM (Digital Rights Management) system. This restricts playback of content to specific registered devices.

If the incorrect DRM file is loaded, “Authorization Error This player is not authorized to play this video.” will appear on the screen. When you attempt to play DivX VOD, the number of plays is limited and the right message will appear on the screen. If you wish to play it, select “Yes”.

If the number of plays goes over

• the limit, then “Rental Expired” will be displayed. In this case, the file will not be played.

/Movie-01.DIVX

Movie-01

Movie-02

Movie-03

Movie-04

Movie-05

Movie-06

Movie-07

Movie-08

) to resume playback (from

Select Files

Repeat :Off

Mode :Off

JPEG Preview

” appears on the

) again or unload the disc, the unit

View DivX(R) VOD Rental This rental has 5 views left.

Do you want to use one

of your 5 views now?

NoYe s

Page 16

MP3/JPEG/DivX® and Audio CD operation

Repeat playback (Audio CD/MP3/JPEG/DivX®)

In the file browser, press ///

to select “Repeat” during stop mode.

Press ENTER repeatedly to select

“Track” or “All”.

Press PLAY ( ).

The unit automatically starts repeat playback after finishing the current track.

To resume normal playback

Select Repeat : “Off” in step 2.

Random playback (Audio CD/MP3/JPEG/DivX®)

In the file browser, press ///

to select “Mode” during stop mode.

Press ENTER to select “Random”.

Press PLAY ( ).

The Random playback will start.

To resume normal playback Select Mode : “Off” in step 2.

Note:

The repeat or random function is

• cancelled when you eject the disc or turn the power off. The track repeat function is cancelled

•

or is pressed.

when In case of Audio CD, the function of

• A-B Repeat also can be used. See “A-B Repeat playback” (See page

37).

Folder-1 Folder-2 MP3-1

Select Files

Repeat :Off

Mode :Off

Select Files

Repeat :Track

Mode :Off

Select Files

Repeat :Off

Mode :Off

Select Files

Repeat :Off

Mode :Random

MP3/JPEG/DivX® and Audio CD operation

Program playback (Audio CD/MP3/JPEG/DivX®)

In the file browser, press///

to select “Edit Mode”, then press ENTER.

When “Edit Mode” is black color, you can mark the files which you want to add into Program list.

Press /// to select the file

you want to add into the program list.

Press ENTER. Selected file was marked. Repeat this procedure to select the other files.

Press /// to select “Add To

Program”. Then press ENTER. All marked files are added into the program list. (The maximum number of files can be added is

30.)

When you finish storing the files you want into the Program list, select “Edit Mode” again and press ENTER to release edit mode.

Press / to select “Program View”, then press ENTER.

Program View shows only the programed files that you have added in Step 2.

Browser View Program View

Folder-1 Folder-2 MP3-1 MP3-2

In the Program View, press PLAY ( ). The files start to

playback in programmed order that were added by you.

To remove file from program list in stop mode

In the Edit Mode, switch to Program View. Select the files you want to remove, then press ENTER. Select “Clear Program” and press ENTER. Marked file is removed from program list.

Note:

The program function is cancelled when you eject the disc or

• turn the power off.

Edit Mode

ProgramView

AddTo Program

Folder-1

Repeat :Off

Folder-2

Mode :Off

MP3-1

P3-1.MP3

Folder-1 Folder-2

MP3-1

Folder-1 Folder-2 MP3-1

MP3-1 MP3-2 MP3-5 MP3-3

Repeat :Off

Mode :Off

ProgramView

AddTo Program

Edit Mode

Browser View

Clear Program

Edit Mode

Program playback/Random playback

You can arrange the playback order of tracks or files on the disc. And the unit can also select tracks or files at random and playback them. These feature works for Video CD. For Audio CD and MP3/JPEG/DivX CD, please see “Random playback (Audio CD/MP3/JPEG/DivX page 44 and “Program playback (Audio CD/MP3/JPEG/DivX page 45.

Note:

•

In case of Video CD with PBC, you cannot set Program playback.

•

The program is cancelled when you eject the disc or turn the power off.

•

In case of Video CD with PBC, you cannot set Random function during playback.

)” on

Program playback (VCD)

Press PLAY MODE during

stop mode.

Press / to select “Mode”,

then press ENTER to select “Program”.

Press / to select the

programming position. Use Number buttons (0–9) to input the track numbers on sequentially.

If you input a wrong number, press CANCEL.•

Press / to return to the left column, then press / to

select the “Program Playback” and press ENTER.

The programs you selected will start to playback in order.

•

To resume normal playback, select Mode “Off” in step 2.

To change the program

Select Mode to “Program” (as step 2), press /// to select the track number you want to change, then press CANCEL.

Press Number buttons (0–9) to overwrite the new track number.

To clear the program one by one

Select Mode to “Program”, press /// to select the track number. Then press CANCEL.

To clear all the programs

In the above column, press / to select “Clear Program”. Then press ENTER.

Random playback (VCD)

Press PLAY MODE during playback or stop mode.

Press / to select “Mode”,

then press ENTER to select “Random”.

Press PLAY ( ).

The Random Playback will start.

If you set “Random” during playback mode, Random

• playback will begin after the track that is currently being played has ended. To resume normal playback, select Mode “Off” in step 2.

•

Play Mode

Mode : Off

Repeat : Off

Program Playback

Play Mode

Mode : Program

Repeat : Off

Program Playback

Play Mode

Mode : Program

Repeat : Off

Program Playback

Play Mode

Mode : Random

Repeat : Off

Program Playback

1 – – – 2 – – – 3 – – –

1 9

2 – – – 3 – – –

1 – – – 2 – – – 3 – – –

Customizing The Function Settings

You can change the default settings to customize performance to your preference.

Setting procedure

Press SETUP in stop mode.

The following on-screen display appears.

Press  or  to select the desired

section, then press  or ENTER.

First option will be highlighted.

Press  or  to select the desired option.

Then press  or ENTER.

The selectable settings will appear.

Change the selection using  or , by referring to the

corresponding pages 48 ~ 50. Press ENTER to save the setting.

Repeat steps 3 and 5 to change other option.

• To select another section, go back to step 2 by pressing

•  or RETURN repeatedly.

To clear SETUP screen, press SETUP or press RETURN

repeatedly.

Setting details

Section Option Details

To select the language of “Menu”,

Subtitle

“Subtitle” and “Audio” if more than one

Audio

languages are available on the disc.

OSD To select a preferred language for on

screen display.

To select a picture size according to the

Screen

aspect ratio of your TV.

Display To turn On or Off the operational status

display on the screen.

Picture

To select a preferred picture mode from

Mode

“Video”, “Film” or “Auto”.

JPEG

To select a preferred setting for the slide

Interval

show playback.

Night

To select On or Off for Night Mode.

Mode Digital

To select a digital output sound

Out

format corresponding to your system connection.

Parental To select a preferred parental level for

the parental setting. Password To change the password. DivX(R)

To display your 8-character registration VOD

code.

Parental : Off

DRC : Off

E.B.L. : Off

Menu : English

Set Password

QSound : On

TV Screen : 4:3

Subtitle : English

Output : Interlace

Display : On

Audio : English

DivX(R) VOD

Picture Mode : Auto

OSD : English

JPEG Interval : 5 Seconds

Screen Saver : On

Parental : Off

DRC : Off

Menu : English

TV Screen : 16:9

Set Password

QSound : On

Subtitle : English

Display : On

Output : Interlace

Audio : English

Picture Mode : Auto

DivX(R) VOD

JPEG Interval : Off

Parental : Off

DRC : Off

Menu : English

TV Screen : 16:9

Set Password

QSound : On

Subtitle : English

Display : On

Output : Interlace

Audio : English

Picture Mode : Auto

DivX(R) VOD

JPEG Interval : Off

TV Screen 4:3

Display : On

Picture Mode : Aut

JPEG Interval : Off

4:3

16:9

Page

Page 17

Customizing The Function Settings

Menu, Subtitle, Audio

You can select the language of “Menu”, “Subtitle” and “Audio” if more than one language is recorded onto the disc.

English, Francais, Espanol, Deutsch, Italiano:

The selected language will be heard or seen.

Parental : Off

DRC : Off

E.B.L. : Off

Menu : English

Set Password

QSound : On

TV Screen : 4:3

Subtitle : English

Output : Interlace

Display : On

Audio : English

DivX(R) VOD

Picture Mode : Auto

OSD : English

JPEG Interval : 5 Seconds

Screen Saver : On

Parental : Off

DRC : Off

TV Screen : 16:9

Set Password

QSound : On

Display : On

Output : Interlace

Picture Mode : Auto

DivX(R) VOD

JPEG Interval : Off

Other:

Other languages can be selected (see “Language Code List” on page 52).

Off (Subtitle):

Subtitles do not appear.

Original (Audio):

The unit will select the first priority language of each disc.

Note:

If the selected language is not recorded on the disc, the first- priority

• language is selected. Subtitles of Divx

• Code List in page 52 for the Languages and Codes which able to be set.

OSD

The setup language can be selected.

English: To display OSD language is English Francais: To display OSD language is French Espanol: To display OSD language is Spanish Deutsch: To display OSD language is German Italiano: To display OSD language is Italian

TV Screen

You have the following screen sizes to choose from:

4:3

When playing back a wide screen-DVD disc, it displays the wide picture with black bands at the top and bottom of screen.

4:3

It displays the wide picture on the whole screen with left and right edges automatically cut off.

16:9

A wide screen picture is displayed full size, although the image on the screen may be geometrically distorted in this mode because the TV screen has an aspect ratio of 4:3 not 16:9.

Note:

If the DVD disc is not formatted in the pan & scan style, it displays 4:3

• style.

Display

On screen display can be switched on or off when you press any buttons.

Off: On screen displays do not appear when you press any buttons

On: On screen displays appear when you press the buttons (factory

file are also able to be set. Please refer the Language

(Letterbox)

(Panscan)

(Wide screen)

except SUBTITLE, PLAY MODE, MARKER, JUMP.

setting).

, AUDIO SELECT and

Parental : Off

Menu : English

E.B.L. : Off

Night Mode : Off

Set Password

Subtitle : English

TV Screen : 4:3

Digital Out : Bitstream

Output : Interlace

Audio : English

Display : On

DivX(R)VOD

Picture Mode : Auto

JPEG Interval : 5 Seconds

Screen Saver : On

Customizing The Function Settings

Picture Mode

There are two types of source content in pictures recorded in DVD video discs: film content (pictures recorded from films at 24 frames per second) and video content (video signals recorded at 30 frames per second). Make this selection according to the type of content being viewed.

Auto: Select this selection normally. The DVD player automatically detects source content, film

or video of playback source, and converts that signal in an appropriate method.

Film: The DVD player converts film content pictures appropriately.

Suitable for playback of film content pictures.

Video: The DVD player filters video signal, and converts it appropriately. Suitable for playback of video content pictures.

Note:

Depending on the disc, pictures may be cut off or doubled. In this case,

• select “Video”.

JPEG Interval

You can continuously playback all JPEG files automatically. After the selection below, the disc will start playback on JPEG files which have been recorded.

Off: Plays back one file at a time. 5 Seconds: Plays back images in the form of a slide show at 5 second

10 Seconds: Plays back images in the form of a slide show at 10 second

15 Seconds: Plays back images in the form of a slide show in 15 second

Night Mode

Night Mode enables you to control the dynamic range so as to achieve a suitable sound for your equipment.

Off: It plays back at the recording level on the disc. On: Loud sound such as explosion is toned down slightly when played

Note:

•

Digital Out

You can select the digital output sound format corresponding to your system connection.

Off: There is no sound output from DIGITAL AUDIO OUT jack. PCM: Change Dolby Digital to PCM for the output.

Select when connected to a 2 channel digital stereo

Bitstream: Disc audio bitstream data will be output.

Note:

•

intervals.

back. This is suitable when it is connected to a stereo.

This function works only when the disc recorded with Dolby Digital is played back. The level of Night Mode may differ depending on DVD video disc.

amplifier.

Even if you select “Bitstream”, MPEG Audio will be output in PCM format.

Customizing The Function Settings

Parental

Some discs are specified as not suitable for children. Such discs can be limited not to playback with the unit.

1) Press  or  to select “Parental”, then press ENTER. “Enter Password”

screen will appear.

2) Press “0000” using Number buttons (0–9). (Please note, this is pre-

DRC : Off

E.B.L. : Off

Menu : English

Parental : Off

QSound : On

TV Screen : 4:3

Subtitle : English

Password : Change

DivX(R) VOD : Display

Display : On

Audio : English

Picture Mode : Auto

OSD : English

JPEG Interval : 5 Seconds

Screen Saver : On

setting password of this unit). Then press ENTER. The parental level list will appear.

Level 1: DVD software for adults cannot be played back. Level 8: Virtually all DVD software can be played back. Level Off: The parental control setting does not function.

3) Press  or  to select from the level 1 to level 8. The limitation will be

more severe as the level number is lower. Then press ENTER.

4) Press

to activate Parental control setting.

Note:

If each setup (pages 48 ~ 50) has been completed, the unit can always

• work under the same condition (especially with DVD discs). Each setup will be retained in the memory even if you turn the power off. Depending on the discs, the unit cannot limit playback.

• Some discs may not be encoded with specific rating level information

• though its disc jacket says “adult.” For those discs, the age restriction will not work. The password is required every time when you change the parental

• level. If you input a wrong number, press CANCEL.

•

Password

1) Press  or  to select “Password”, then press ENTER. “Enter Current

Password” screen will appear.

2) Press Number buttons (0–9) to input the current password (If the

password has not been set yet after you purchase this unit, it is “0000”).

3) Then press ENTER. “Enter New Password” screen will appear. Press

Number buttons (0–9) to input the new password.

4) Press ENTER. Now your new password has been set. Be sure to

remember this number!

If you forget the password.

1) Press

to remove the disc.

2) While holding 7 down on the remote control and at the same time

press STOP (DVD) on the side panel. “Password Clear” appears on the screen. Now the password has been returned to the initial value (“0000”).

(R)

DivX

VOD

In order to play DivX® VOD (Video On Demand) content on this unit, you first need to register the unit with your DivX generating a DivX

1) Press  or  to select “DivX(R) VOD”. Then press ENTER.

VOD registration code, which you submit to your provider.

Your 8-character registration code is displayed. Make a note of the code as you will need it when you register with a DivX ENTER to select Done.

VOD content provider. You do this by

VOD provider. Then press

Temporary cancel the rating level by DVD disc

Depending on the DVD disc, the disc may try to temporarily cancel the rating level that you have set. It is up to you to decide whether to cancel the rating level or not.

Note:

•

This temporary cancellation of rating level will be kept until the disc is ejected. When the disc is ejected, the original rating level will be set again automatically.

Load a DVD disc.

If the DVD disc has been designed to temporarily cancel the

Rating level, the screen which follows the “Reading” screen will change, depending on which disc is played. If you select “YES” with the ENTER, password input screen will then appear.

Enter the password with

Number buttons (0–9). Then press ENTER.

To exit from the entry, press RETURN.

Playback will commence if the entered password was

correct.

Enter Password

Page 18

Language Code List

Enter the appropriate code number for the initial settings “Menu”, “Subtitle” and/or “Audio” (see pages 48).

Language Name Code Language Name Code Language Name Code Language Name Code Abkhazian 1112 Fiji 1620 Lingala 2224 Singhalese 2919 Afar 1111 Finnish 1619 Lithuanian 2230 Slovak* 2921 Afrikaans 1116 French* 1628 Macedonian* 2321 Slovenian* 2922 Albanian* 2927 Frisian 1635 Malagasy 2317 Somali 2925 Amharic 1123 Galician 1722 Malay 2329 Spanish* 1529 Arabic 1128 Georgian 2111 Malayalam 2322 Sundanese 2931 Armenian 1835 German* 1415 Maltese 2330 Swahili 2933 Assamese 1129 Greek* 1522 Maori 2319 Swedish 2932 Aymara 1135 Greenlandic 2122 Marathi 2328 Tagalog 3022 Azerbaijani 1136 Guarani 1724 Moldavian 2325 Tajik 3017 Bashkir 1211 Gujarati 1731 Mongolian 2324 Tamil 3011 Basque 1531 Hausa 1811 Nauru 2411 Tatar 3030 Bengali; Bangla 1224 Hebrew* 1933 Nepali 2415 Telugu 3015 Bhutani 1436 Hindi 1819 Norwegian 2425 Thai 3018 Bihari 1218 Hungarian* 1831 Oriya 2528 Tibetan 1225 Breton 1228 Icelandic 1929 Panjabi 2611 Tigrinya 3019 Bulgarian* 1217 Indonesian 1924 Pashto, Pushto 2629 Tonga 3025 Burmese 2335 Interlingua 1911 Persian 1611 Turkish 3028 Byelorussian* 1215 Irish 1711 Polish* 2622 Turkmen 3021 Cambodian 2123 Italian* 1930 Portuguese 2630 Twi 3033 Catalan 1311 Japanese 2011 Quechua 2731 Ukrainian* 3121 Chinese 3618 Javanese 2033 Corsican 1325 Kannada 2124 Romanian* 2825 Uzbek 3136 Croatian* 1828 Kashmiri 2129 Russian* 2831 Vietnamese 3219 Czech* 1329 Kazakh 2121 Samoan 2923 Volapük 3225 Danish 1411 Kirghiz 2135 Sanskrit 2911 Welsh 1335 Dutch 2422 Korean 2125 Scots Gaelic 1714 Wolof 3325 English* 1524 Kurdish 2131 Serbian* 2928 Xhosa 3418 Esperanto 1525 Laothian 2225 Serbo-Croatian* 2918 Yiddish 2019 Estonian 1530 Latin 2211 Shona 2924 Yoruba 3525 Faroese 1625 Latvian, Lettish 2232 Sindhi 2914 Zulu 3631

Note:

•

Subtitles of Divx displayed in the languages without *.

file are applied to only the languages marked with *. Subtitles of Divx® cannot be

Rhaeto-Romance

2823 Urdu 3128

PC connection

As PCs are sometimes supplied with a ‘conventional’ CRT monitor, you may need to adjust the display settings of your PC’s graphics card, otherwise the pictures may not appear correctly. Switch on your PC (still with your original monitor) - select ‘1360 x 768’ for the screen resolution, and select 60 Hz for the on-screen refresh rate. Switch off your PC, then connect it to your LCD TV while both items are still switched off.

Monitor Display modes

MODE Resolution V. Frequency H. Frequency Pixel Clock Frequency

VGA 640 x 480 60.000Hz 31.500kHz 25.200MHz

SVGA 800 x 600 60.317Hz 37.879kHz 40.000MHz

XGA 1024 x 768 60.004Hz 48.363kHz 65.000MHz WXGA 1280 x 720 59.870Hz 47.776kHz 79.500MHz WXGA 1280 x 768 59.939Hz 44.955kHz 74.175MHz WXGA 1360 x 768 60.015Hz 47.712kHz 85.5000MHz

(according to Graphic card)

Select PC input

Switch on the LCD-TV. Select the PC input mode (see page 11). (When you use HDMI cable, select HDMI input mode.)

Note:

•

If there is no video signal from the computer when the unit is in PC mode, “NO SIGNAL” will appear on the TV screen.

•

Digital PC connection via HDMI input is not supported. If you try to connect your PC digitally anyway, the TV-operation might freeze. TV will stop to respond properly on usercommands. Countermeasure: Switch-off your TV and disconnect from the 220~240V power-supply. Disconnect the digital PC connection. Now you may retry operating your TV. If a digital PC connection does show

• a picture, proper working is not guaranteed. Digital PC connection is not granted for this TV.

Description about the each setting option:

PICTURE Menu BRIGHTNESS and CONTRAST: You can adjust these

according to your personal preferences. HOR POSITION and VER POSITION: To adjust the horizontal and vertical placing of the image. PHASE and CLOCK: Eliminates the horizontal (PHASE) and vertical (CLOCK) interfering lines.

RED/GREEN/BLUE: Influences the colour balance. BACKLIGHT: Press  or  to adjust the level you require. WXGA INPUT: When you input an WXGA signal, set this

option to “ON”. RESET: Press ENTER to reset BRIGHTNESS, CONTRAST, RED, GREEN, BLUE and BACKLIGHT to the factory preset values.

Use a PC-VGA cable (not supplied) to connect the LCD-Monitor to your PC. You can also connect the PC with HDMI cable. If you use HDMI cable, you don’t have to connect the audio cable. If you use HDMI-to-DVI cable, please connect audio cable as same way as VGA cable. Make the connections carefully so as not to break or bend the contacts inside the plug.

TV (Back side view)

to PC/HDMI1 AUDIO input

to HDMI input

Audio cable

(not supplied)

VGA cable

(not supplied)

to DVI output

Example: Adjust the contrast.

During PC mode press MENU.

The Menu will appear on the screen.

Select CONTRAST, then press

ENTER. Press  or  to adjust CONTRAST.

Press EXIT to return to the normal screen.

AUDIO Menu BASS/TREBLE/BALANCE: Tone setting

menu. SURROUND (26DV615DG): Press  or  to select surround sound feature ON or OFF. RESET: Press ENTER to reset BASS, TREBLE and BALANCE to the factory preset values.

BRIGHTNESS 25

CONTRAST 40

HOR POSITION 0

VER POSITION

PHASE 25

CLOCK

Connecting an HDMI or a DVI device to the HDMI input

The HDMI (HDMI1)input receives digital audio and uncompressed video from a HDMI equipped device or uncompressed digital video from a DVI equipped device. When you connect the HDMI (HDMI1) to a DVI device with a HDMI-to-DVI adapter cable, it only transfers the video signal, so it is necessary to use separate analogue leads to transfer the audio signals. Select the HDMI input mode (see page11).

Note:

•

This set is classed as “HD-Ready”. This means that it is capable of displaying HD (High Definition) signals when connected to a suitable HD source, such as an HD receiver or DVD player that has HD capability, via HDMI, DVI, or Component Video connections. Some devices may not operate

• properly with the TV.

HDMI, the HDMI logo and HighDefinition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.

(Back side view)

To PC/HDMI1 AUDIO input

Selecting the HDMI audio input source

You must choose the appropriate HDMI audio input setting for each connection, depending on whether the source is equipped with a DVI or HDMI socket.

Note:

•

(HDMI type A connector) (not supplied)

Select HDMI1 AUDIO (only for 26DV615DG, the rest of the models are “HDMI AUDIO”) then press ENTER. Press  or  to select HDMI or DVI.

Press EXIT to return to the normal screen.

Follow the user’s manual that came with the HDMI-device, which you try to connect to this TV. If there is no picture available via HDMI-connection, do connect via SCART-cable first. Use the HDMI-device’s remote-control to call the HDMI-device’s setup-menu onto the screen. Follow the HDMI-device’s manual, to set its video-output to HDMI. When successfully set to HDMI, select this TV’s HDMI-input, as described in here on page 11 (Select Video Input).

To DVI output

HDMI - to - DVI adapter cable

HDMI cable (type A connector)

(not supplied)

To HDMI output

Audio cable

(not supplied)

DVI device

HDMI device

NICAM AUTO

BASS 25

TREBLE 25

BALANCE 0

SURROUND OFF

HDMI 1 AUDIOHDMI

HDMI

Connection to other equipment

1. Connecting other units to your TV Caution. Before connecting:

• Make sure to disconnect the appliance from the power

supply in order to avoid any potential damage from occurring.

• Make sure to establish the required connection.

• Make sure that connections are properly and correctly

attached before connecting the appliances to the power supply.

Connect with Satellite receiver as shown below. Select the TV-Program at the satellite receiver. To do this, use the remote control of the satellite receiver. You cannot store the same station once again additionally in LCD-Monitor which already stored in satellite receiver.

Antenna

Satellite antenna

DEC

Decoder

Satellite receiver

VCR

2. Connecting a DVD player

TV (Back side view)

(SCART cable, not supplied)

(All illustrated SCART cables and antenna cables are not supplied)

Video recorder

DVD Player

TV (Back side view)

AV3

ANT.

AV1

To ensure optimum picture quality, select RGB for the DVD player’s output signal (see Owner’s manual of the DVD player). AV1 SCART is compatible with RGB signal. Select AV1 input mode to view (see page 11).

ANT

DVD player

Page 19

Connection to other equipment

3. Connecting an audio system

You can supply the TV sound to the stereo equipment (A) with the scart socket. Use a special scart cable

for the connection sold separately. (please consult your hi-fi instructions for details). If you have a surround sound amplifier/decoder (B) with a coaxial digital input, you can connect the Coaxial Digital Audio Output to it, using a suitable coaxial digital lead. This connection carries the audio signal from the set’s Digital channels only.

Note:

•

The Bass/Treble/Balance adjustments (see P.18) only function with the sound from the TV speakers - it does not affect the audio output sockets.

TV (Back side view)

Stereo amplifier

Audio in put

Connection to other equipment

5. Connecting to a DVD player or other AV device with Component Video outputs

If your DVD player (or other device) has Component Video output jacks, use a suitable set of leads (RCA/

Phono) to connect these to the Component Video inputs on this TV as shown - it can greatly enhance the picture quality and performance. Please remember that you will also need to connect separate leads (RCA/Phono) for the audio signals. Select the COMPONENT input mode (see page 11).

(A)

To COMPONENT IN

TV (Back side view)

(Scart-RCA cable, not supplied)

(Coaxial digital lead, not supplied)

•

After connecting a Dolby Digital decoder please select in the DVD menu the Dolby Digital (DD) sound track option.

•

Several DVDs may be pre-recorded on both sides however only one side contains the Dolby Digital sound track. Please insert the correct DVD side.

•

When a DTS sound track is played the integrated loudspeakers are mute. The DTS sound can only be played digitally using the digital outlet. DTS decoder is necessary for hearing.

•

Digital audio output is active only when receiving DVB-T, not when receiving analogue cable TV broadcasting.

4. Connecting Video camera and Video recorder

Select the AV input mode (see page 11). You can see the playback picture from video camera.

Note:

• If you have a camcorder with S-video, use an S-video cable instead of a standard video cable. Do not connect both a standard video cable and an S-video cable at the same time, or the picture performance will be unacceptable. (19/22DV615/ 616DG)

TV (Back side view)

(AV cable, not supplied)

(SCART cable, not supplied)

Surround sound amplifier system

AV output

Video recorder

Video camera

Audio cable (not supplied)

(B)

Note:

The Component Video input of this unit are for use with equipment which outputs interlaced signals

• (PAL: 576i/1080i or NTSC: 480i/1080i) and progressive signals (PAL: 576p/720p or NTSC: 480p/720p).

Video cable (not supplied)

Component output

YPbPr

DVD player

Audio output

Status message

Information/Statusmessage Cause

Invalid entry The channel does not exist. (e.g., “000“) No radio services Cannot change to Radio mode because there is no radio service in the

No TV services Cannot change to TV mode because there is no TV service in the channel list. No services There are no services in the received signal. No subtitles There are no subtitles in the received signal. No video No audio The signal does not contain audio or video.

Audio stream not available The Multi Audio Menu cannot be displayed because there is no sound. Descrambling not possible The services for the selected channel are not available for this card. CI card initialized CI card is initializing. CAM module has been removed CAM module has been removed. (CAM is used for inserting the CI card.) Database empty There are no services in the TV. No signal There are no signal inputs. Locked service The service is locked with the channel organizer. Scrambled service The service is scrambled and unavailable. Digital Service Not available. Not Running Broadcasting has been suspended. HD service This service is for HD. New service added … A new service has been added. Upgrading available service details Service information has been changed. The channel list is updating. Duplicate carrier found The same signal has already been set. Invalid Stream Contains a video format that is not supported by this TV.

channel list.

Troubleshooting table

Please check the following list before requesting service.

Symptom Possible solution Page

No picture, no sound Switch on the set.

No reception Have you tuned in the TV stations?

The TV switches off with missing antenna input signal

menu, the TUNING

option cannot be selected. Wrong Colours Colour and Brightness errors can occur when the viewing angle /

While viewing a DVB (digital) channel, there is sound but no picture.

Blocky image or image stops intermittently.

Some digital channels cannot be viewed.

“Database empty” message appears on the screen.

DVD

The playback picture has occasional distortion.

The unit does not start playback.

appears on the screen.

The LCD panel is a very high technology product, giving you fine picture details. Occasionally, a few nonactive pixels

• may appear on the screen as a fixed point of blue, green or red. Please note that this does not affect the performance of your product.

* This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual

property rights. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision, and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited.

* Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby

Laboratories.

is a trademark of DVD Format/Logo Licensing Corporation.

* Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent #: 5,451,942 & other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending.

* Unauthorized recording of copyrighted television programs, films, video cassettes and other materials may infringe

the rights of copyright owners and be contrary to copyright laws.

* DivX, DivX Certified, and associated logos are trademarks of DivX, Inc. and are used under license.

Check that the mains power outlet is properly connected. Select appropriate input mode. Unplug unit for 1 minute, then plug it back in.

Connect the antenna. Make sure the set is ON and not in Standby mode

This is normal. 15 minutes after the antenna signal has disappeared, the set will change to standby mode.

The unit is set to AV mode. Press 1 on the remote control. 11

ambient air temperature (see technical specifications) are exceeded. Some channel offers audio content only. It is normal. –

Check all antenna connections. Move the antenna away from areas of possible interference. Try using an antenna booster.

Contact the service provider to subscribe. –

Check all antenna connections and try auto tuning again. 9, 20

The disc is dirty. Eject the disc and clean it. Some times a small amount of picture distortion may appear. This is not a malfunction.

No disc is inserted. Insert a disc. An unplayable disc is inserted. Insert a playable disc (Check the disc type and colour system). Place the disc in the disc slot with the label side facing forward. The disc is dirty. Clean the disc. Cancel the parental lock function or change the parental lock level.

The function is prohibited with the unit or the disc. 34

10, 11

31, 32

50, 51

Specifications

Model 19DV615DG/

6 9

9 6

System: Analogue: PAL UK, IR, CCIR, FRENCH System, B/G, D/K, I/I, L

Video Colour System: PAL/SECAM/NTSC 3.58/NTSC 4.43/PAL 60

Preset channels: Analogue channels (99) + Digital channels (Carrier 200/Service1000)

Frequency Range: Analogue: IreE2~E4, X~Z+2, S1~S10, E5~E12, S11~S41, E21~E69

LCD: 470 mm visible* 548 mm visible* 661 mm visible*

–

32 31

HDMI input: HDMI compliant (type A connector)

Audio Output Power: approx. 1.5W (MAX) x 2 approx. 10W (MAX) x 2

DVD

Signal system: NTSC, PAL (Region 2)

Applicable disc: DVD (12cm, 8cm), CD (12cm, 8cm)

Output: Audio : (RCA) –12.0 dBm, 1 k 

Pickup: CD : Wavelength: 775 - 805 nm

GENERAL

Power Source: AC 220-240V, 50Hz

Power Consumption: Operation: approx. 38W

Weight: 5.2 kg 5.4 kg 10.3 kg

Dimensions: 47.6(W)x36.4(H)x

Surrounding temperature:

ACCESSORIES

2 batteries (AAA/R03/UM-4)/Remote control unit/Aerial cable/AC cord 2 batteries (AAA/R03/

Weight and Dimensions are approximate. Because we continually strive to improve our products we may change specifications and designs without prior notice.

19DV616DG

Digital: DVB-T (OFDM 2k/8k 16QAM/64QAM)

Digital: E5~E12, ItaD~H2, Fra1~6, Rus6~12, E21~E69

TFT low-glass Active Matrix Colour LCD, 1366 x 768 Pixel

HDCP compliant Suggested scan rates: PAL: 576i/576p/720p/1080i NTSC: 480i/480p/720p/1080i PC Audio: 2-channel PCM, 32/44.1/48 kHz sampling frequency 16/20/24 bits per sample

Digital Audio : 0.5Vp-p/75 

Maximum output power: 0.5 mW DVD : Wavelength: 640 - 660 nm Maximum output power: 1.0 mW

at 230V, 50Hz Standby: approx. 0.8W at 230V, 50Hz

20.7(D)cm

Operation: 5°C ~ 40°C/Storage: –20°C ~ 60°C

*Visible screen size is approximate.

22DV615DG/ 22DV616DG

Operation: approx. 53W at 230V, 50Hz Standby: approx. 0.8W at 230V, 50Hz

55.0(W)x40.7(H)x

20.7(D)cm

26DV615DG

Operation: approx. 94W at 230V, 50Hz Standby: approx. 0.7W at 230V, 50Hz

68.1(W)x51.4(H)x

22.7(D)cm

UM-4)/Remote control unit/AC cord

Page 20

SERVICING NOTICES ON CHECKING

required.

1. KEEP THE NOTICES 6. PERFORM A SAFETY CHECK AFTER SERVICING

As for the places which need special attentions, they are indicated with the labels or seals on the Confirm that the screws, parts and wiring which cabinet, chassis and parts. Make sure to keep the were removed in order to service are put in the indications and notices in the operation manual. original positions, or whether there are the

portions which are deteriorated around the

2. AVOID AN ELECTRIC SHOCK

There is a high voltage part inside. Avoid an external metal and the AC cord plug blades. electric shock while the electric current is And be sure the safety of that. flowing.

3. USE THE DESIGNATED PARTS

The parts in this equipment have the specific 2. Remove the antenna terminal on TV and turn characters of incombustibility and withstand on the TV. voltage for safety. Therefore, the part which is 3. Insulation resistance between the cord plug replaced should be used the part which has terminals and the eternal exposure metal the same character. Especially as to the important parts for safety using the 500V insulation resistance meter which is indicated in the circuit diagram or the table of parts as a ! mark, the designated 4. If the insulation resistance is less than 1M parts must be used. ohm, the inspection repair should be

serviced places serviced or not. Check the insulation between the antenna terminal or

(INSULATION CHECK PROCEDURE)

1. Unplug the plug from the AC outlet.

[Note 2] should be more than 1M ohm by

[Note 1].

4. BE CAREFUL WITH THE

LCD PANEL [Note 1]

If you have not the 500V insulation Avoid a shock to the panel while servicing. resistance meter, use a Tester. Take enough care to deal with it.

[Note 2]

5. PUT PARTS AND WIRES IN THE ORIGINAL POSITION AFTER ASSEMBLING OR WIRING

There are parts which use the insulation material such as a tube or tape for safety, or which are assembled in the condition that these do not contact with the printed board. The inside wiring is designed not to get closer to the pyrogenic parts and high voltage parts. Therefore, put these parts in the original positions.

External exposure metal: Antenna terminal

Headphone jack

HOW TO ORDER PARTS

Please include the following informations when you order parts. (Particularly the VERSION LETTER.)

1. MODEL NUMBER and VERSION LETTER The MODEL NUMBER can be found on the back of each product and the VERSION LETTER can be found at the end of the SERIAL NUMBER.

2. PART NO. and DESCRIPTION You can find it in your SERVICE MANUAL.

IMPORTANT

When you exchange IC and Transistor with a heat sink, apply silicon grease (YG6260M) on the contact section of the heat sink. Before applying new silicon grease, remove all the old silicon grease. (Old grease may cause damage to the IC and Transistor).

A1-1 19DV616DG/22DV616DG

Page 21

WHEN REPLACING DVD DECK

[ When removing the DVD Deck ]

Before removing Pick Up PCB and DVD MT PCB connector, the short circuit the position shown in Fig. 1 using a soldering iron. If you remove the DVD Deck with no soldering, the Laser may be damaged.

[ When installing the DVD Deck ]

Remove all the soldering on the short circuit position after the connection of Pick Up PCB and DVD MT PCB connector.

NOTE

• Before your operation, please read “PREPARATION OF SERVICING”.

• Use the Lead Free solder.

• Manual soldering conditions

•

Solderin

• Soldering time: Within 3 seconds

• Soldering combination: Sn-3.0Ag-0.5Cu

• When Soldering/Removing of solder, use the draw in equipment over the Pick Up Unit to keep the Flux smoke away from it.

temperature: 320 ± 20oC

Circuit bridge points

Pick Up PCB

Fig. 1

A1-2 19DV616DG/22DV616DG

Page 22

DISC REMOVAL METHOD AT NO POWER SUPPLY

5.Simultaneously press and hold the “7” key on the remote control unit

1. Remove the Stand, Front Cabinet Ass'y and LCD Panel.

(Refer to item 1 of the DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS.)

Slide the Gear Middle toward the arrow direction by hand to release the lock. (Refer to Fig. 1)

3. Take out the Disc from the DVD Deck. Be careful not to scratch on the Disc.

DVD Deck

Gear Middle

Fig. 1

PARENTAL CONTROL - RATING LEVEL

4 DIGIT PASSWORD CANCELLATION

FOR DVD MODE

If the stored 4 digit password in the Rating Level menu needs to be cancelled, please follow the steps below.

1. Turn Unit ON.

2. Set the DVD to the Stop Mode.

3. Check that “No disc” is displayed on the screen.

4. Press and hold the “STOP” button on the front panel. .

6. Hold both keys for more than 2 seconds.

7. The On Screen Display message “PASSWORD CLEAR” will appear.

8. The 4 digit password has now been cleared.

FOR DTV MODE

If the stored 4 digit password in the Rating Level menu needs to be cancelled, please follow the steps below.

1. Turn on the power.

2. Set the VOLUME to minimum.

3. Press both VOL. DOWN button on the set and Channel button (3) on the remote control for more than 2 seconds.

4. The 4 digit password has naw been cancelled.

NOTE: No indications on the screen when the Parental Lock is setting. Initializing password is 0000.

A1-3 19DV616DG/22DV616DG

Page 23

HOTEL MODE FUNCTION

䃂

To set the Hotel mode, please follow the steps below.

In power on mode, set the VOLUME to minimum. Press and hold the VOLUME DOWN button on the side panel.

Simultaneously press and hold the channel button (7) on the remote control for more than 2 seconds.

The Hotel mode setting menu will appear.

Using the UP/DOWN button on the remote control, select the desired mode. Then press the ENTER button. Using the LEFT/RIGHT button on the remote control, set the mode to desired setting.6.

The Hotel mode has now been set up.

To set the Hotel mode, please follow the steps below.

1. In power on mode, set the VOLUME to minimum.

2. Press and hold the VOLUME DOWN button on the side panel.

Simultaneously press and hold the channel button (7) on the remote control for more than 2 seconds.

4. The Hotel mode setting menu will appear.

5. Using the UP/DOWN button on the remote control, select the RESET. Then press the ENTER button.

6. The setting items has now been returned to initial value.

Setting item

Maximum volume

0~50

Initial valueSetting value

Setting of the maximum volume value.

PANEL BUT TON

MENU BU T TON

INPUT MODE S TART

RESET

IT:END

FUNCTION

HOT E L MOD E

IMUMVOL UME50

RESPOND

OFF

Panel button

Menu button

RESPOND/

NO RESPOND

RESPOND

Effective/invalid setting of main key operation. (*Note 1)

Effective/invalid setting of Menu key operation of set and remote control. (*Note 1)

1~99ch/DTV/AV COMPONENT/ HDMI/PC/DVD/

OFF

Setting of input source at power supply On. (*Note 2)Input mode start

OFF

Reset Various settings of the Hotel mode function return initial State.

Note 1) Even if setting it to "No Respond", the service mode function are effective. Note 2) If setting it to "OFF", it start up in same input source when you turn off the power before.

TRAY LOCK

The disk cannot be taken out by setting the Tray Lock, please follow the steps below.

1. Turn Unit ON.

2. Set the DVD to the Stop Mode.

3. Press it in order of "SEPUP", "SUBTITLE", "3", "AUDIO SELECT" and "0" key of a remote control unit.

4. The On Screen Display message " " will appear.

5. The Tray Lock has now been set up.

To unlock the Tray Lock, please follow the steps below.

1. Turn Unit ON.

2. Set the DVD to the Stop Mode.

3. Press it in order of "SETUP", "SUBTITLE", "3", "AUDIO SELECT" and "0" key of a remote control unit.

4. The On Screen Display message " " will appear.

5. The Tray Lock has now been cleared.

A1-4 19DV616DG/22DV616DG

Page 24



25DIGITAL MENU

40 BF















REMOTE CONTROL KEY CODE

NEC Format Custom Code : 40-BF H, 44-BB H, 45-BA H, 45-BC H

No. Key Name Custom Code Key Code

1 EJECT 45 BA F5 2 TV/DVD 45 BC B3 3 TV/DTV 40 BF 44 4 POWER 40 BF 12 5 1 40 BF 01 6 2 40 BF 02 7 3 40 BF 03 8 4 40 BF 04

9 5 40 BF 05 10 6 40 BF 06 11 7 40 BF 07 12 8 40 BF 08 13 9 40 BF 09 14 DISPLAY 40 BF 1C 15 0 40 BF 00 16 MUTE 40 BF 10 17 TV/RADIO 40 BF 47 18 CH/PAGE 40 BF 3E 19 VOLUME + 40 BF 1A 20 DVD MENU 40 BF 19 21 INPUT 40 BF 0F 22 CH/PAGE 40 BF 3F 23 VOLUME - 40 BF 1E 24 TOP MENU 44 BB DF

26 GUIDE (EPG) 40 BF 45 27 CH/PAGE 44 BB 80 28 LEFT 44 BB 51 29 ENTER/CHANNEL LIST 40 BF 3D 30 RIGHT 44 BB 4D 31 CH/PAGE 44 BB 81 32 MENU/SETUP 40 BF 0E 33 EXIT/CANCEL 44 BB EF 34 RETURN 44 BB 5D 35 PLAY 44 BB 15 36 STOP 44 BB 14 37 SKIP- /HOLD 45 BA 23 38 REVEAL / SEARCH- 45 BA 19 39 SUB PAGE / SEARCH+ 45 BA 13 40 F/T/B / SKIP+ 45 BA 24 41 RED / SLOW- 45 BA 0E 42 GREEN / PAUSE 45 BA 15 43 YELLOW / PLAY MODE 45 BA E0 44 BLUE / SLOW+ 45 BA 0D 45 MARKER 45 BA EC 46 ANGLE 44 BB 96 47 REPEAT A-B 44 BB 5C 48 TEXT/TV 45 BA 79 49 SUBTITLE 44 BB 87 50 AUDIO SELECT 44 BB 53 51 ZOOM/CH RTN 45 BA 40 52 JUMP 44 BB 9B 53 PICTURE SIZE 40 BF 59 54 SLEEP 40 BF 15







 

















































































A1-5 19DV616DG/22DV616DG

Page 25

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

CH Coverage

Analog

IreE2~E4,X~Z+2,S1~S10,E5~E12,S11~S41,E21~E69

G-1 TV LCD LCD Size / Visual Size 18.5 inch / 470.2mmV

System LCD Type Color TFT LCD

Color System PAL / SECAM Speaker 2 Speaker

Sound Output MAX 1.5W + 1.5W

NTSC3.58+4.43 /PAL60Hz Yes

G-2 DVD System Color System NTSC, PAL

Disc DVD, Disc Diameter 120 mm , 80 mm Drive DSM-3 Search speed Fwd 4 step

Slow speed Fwd 1/7 -1/2 times

G-3 Tuning Broadcasting System Analog

System Tuner and System 1Tuner (Analog+Digital)

Receive CH Destination UK, I.R., CCIR Hyper+France CATV

Number of Pixels 1366(H) x 768(V)

View Range Left/Right 85/85 degree

Bright Dot n=0 Zero Bright Dot Ratio --

Position Front Size 1.0 x 2.7 inch Impedance 8 ohm

10%(Typical) ---

Rev 4 step

Rev 1/7 -1/2 times

Digital

Up/Down 80/80 degree

Actual 2-45 times (DVD/Video CD)

Actual --

4-40 times (CD)

U.K., DVB-T

Intermediate Analog

Digital

Frequency Picture(FP) 38.9 / 38.9 / 38.9 / 33.9MHz

Sound(FS) FP-FS

Digital Auto Tuning Method Preset CH Analog 99

Digital Carrier 200 / Service 1000 Stereo/Dual TV Sound Nicam/A2 Dual Tuner Sound Muting Yes

G-4 Signal Video Signal Input Level 1 V p-p/75 ohm

Output Level 1 V p-p/75 ohm

S/N Ratio (Weighted) 65dB

Horizontal Resolution at DVD Mode 400 Lines RGB Signal Output Level -Audio Signal Input Level -8.0dBm/50k ohm

Output Level at DVD -12.0dBm/1k ohm (-20dBFs 0dBFs=2.0Vrms)

at TV -8 dBm/1k ohm (0dBm=0.775Vrms) Digital Output Level 0.5 V p-p/75 ohm S/N Ratio at DVD (W eighted) 85dB Harmonic Distortion 0.02% (1KHz) Frequency Response : at DVD 4Hz - 22kHz

at Video CD 4Hz - 20kHz

at SVCD --

at CD 4Hz - 20kHz

G-5 Power Power Source AC 220-240V AC 50Hz

DC ---

Power Consumption at AC 38 W at AC 230 V 50 Hz

at DC --

Stand by (at AC) w/ EPG Timer 5 W at 230V 50Hz

w/o EPG Timer 0.8 W at 230V 50Hz Per Year -- kWh/Year

Protector Power Fuse Yes

G-6 Regulation Safety CE(EN60065:2002+AMD.1:2006)

Radiation CE X-Radiation ---

G-7 Temperature Operation

Storage Space Around Unit 100 mm(4inch)

G-8 Operating Humidity Less than 80% RH

E5~E12, ItaD~H2, Fra1~6, Rus6~12, E21~E69

BG / II

33.4 / 32.9 / 32.4 / 40.4MHz

5.5 / 6.0 / 6.5 / 6.5MHz

36.167MHz ALL Band (Not C.C.I.R. CH Plan)

C ~ +40oC

C ~ +60oC

-20

A2-1 19DV616DG

Page 26

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

Yes

G-9 OSD Language (TV) English, Spanish, German, French, Italian,

(DVD) English, Spanish, German, French, Italian

G-10 Clock and Sleep Timer Max Time 120 Min

Timer Step 10 Min

On/Off Timer Program(On Timer / Off Timer) -- Program Wake Up Timer No Timer Back-up (at Power Off Mode) more than -- Min Sec EPG Timer Events 8Programs / 8Days

G-11 Remote Unit RC-QJ

Control Glow in Dark Remocon No

Remocon Format TOSHIBA Format TOSHIBA Custom Code 40-BF h ,44-BB h ,45-BA h ,45-BC h Power Source Voltage(D.C) 3V

UM size x pcs UM-4 x 2 pcs

Total Keys 54 Keys Keys Power (Stand By) Yes

Information/(Display) Yes Analog Menu / Setup Yes Digital Menu Yes Input Select Yes ATV/DTV Yes Guide/(EPG) Yes Picture Size Yes 1Yes 2Yes 3Yes 4Yes 5Yes 6Yes 7Yes

Swedish, Dutch, Russian, Portuguese,

Turkish, Greek, Finnish, Polish, Danish, Norwegian

9Yes 0 Yes Sleep Yes Mute Yes Volume Up Yes Volume Down Yes

Enter / CH List Yes Exit / Cancel Yes Freeze frame No TV/Radio Yes Subtitle Yes Play Yes Stop Yes Eject Yes TV / DVD Yes Return Yes DVD Menu Yes Top Menu Yes Marker Yes Angle Yes Repeat A-B Yes Audio Select Yes CH RTN(Quick View) / Zoom Yes Jump Yes

T'TEXT Keys TEXT / TV Yes

HOLD / Skip- Yes Reveal / Search- Yes Sub Page / Search+ Yes F.T.B / Skip+ Yes Red / Slow- Yes Green / Pause Yes Yellow / Play Mode Yes Cyan / Slow+ Yes CH Up / Page Up Yes CH Down / Page Down Yes

Yes Yes Yes Yes

A2-2 19DV616DG

Page 27

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

Surround

G-12 Features Power On Memory Yes

Auto Shut Off Yes Just Clock Function No Game Position No DNR Yes

Comb Filter Yes

Auto Set Up (Fast installation) Auto tuning (Analog tuner) Yes

CH sort Yes

ATS Yes Auto clock (Analog tuner) No Plug in start Yes

Picture Setting(TV) Picture Preference Yes

Brightness , Contrast , Color Yes Tint Yes Sharpness Yes DNR No Color Temperature Yes Blue Back Yes Backlight Control Yes DBC (Dynamic Backlight Control) No Film Mode No

Picture Setting(PC) BRIGHTNESS , CONTRAST Yes

HOR POSITION , VER POSITION Yes PHASE , CLOCK Yes AUTO ADJUST No RED , GREEN , BLUE Yes Backlight Yes WXGA INPUT Yes WVGA INPUT No

Audio Nicam Yes

Tone Control (Bass/Treble/Balance) Yes

BBE No SRS WOW (SRS 3D/Focus/Tru Bass) No

Tuning Auto Tuning Yes

Lock (Analog) Panel Lock No

Screen Saver

Black Side Panel No CH Label Yes T'Text Yes

Text and Picture Yes Wide Mode (AUTO/4:3/16:9/CINEMA/14:9/REAL(HDMI Only) Yes Reset TV Setting Yes HD Zoom No Picture Scroll (Vertical Position) Yes PFC(Power Factor circuit) No Freeze frame No HD-Ready Yes Plug and Play No Brand Badge LED No Scart Spec Scart1 AV in Yes

Scart2 AV in No

Variable Audio Out No

Manual Tuning Yes CH Allocation Yes

Channel Lock No Hotel Lock Yes Inversion No Full W hit e No Screen Saver No Static Image No

Text type Fastext / Toptext Text Language English , French, Swedish, Hungarian

Turkish, German, Portuguese, Spanish, Italian, Greek, Slovakian, Russian, Polish, Czech, Rumanian, Estonian, Lettish, Lithuanian, Ukrainian, Croatian, Slovenian, Latvian

AV out Yes (A.Tuner/D.Tuner/Monitor) S-Video in No RGB in Yes

AV out No S-Video in No RGB in No

A2-3 19DV616DG

Page 28

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

720×576i (4:3)

Yes (50Hz)

Digital Text (VBI teletext) MHEG-5 MHP EPG (BBC type 8Days Digital tuner only) OAD (Over Air Download) Common Interface (Digital tuner only) Rec Screen Status Ch sorting based on Ch List (Digital/Germany only) Rename Carrier (Digital) Edit Event Timer Software Update via CI Slot Preference Language (Audio/Subtitle/Digital Service)(Digital) Ch Organizer (Lock, Skip, Go To, Delete, Rename, Move, Move to, Change No.) Parental Lock (Digital) Time Setup DVB Subtitle (Digital) AC3 Audio Out (Output via SPDIF Only) PC Monitor Input Yes

VGA (640x480) Yes (60Hz) VGA (720x400) No (Possible to Display) WVGA (848x480) No SVGA (800x600) Yes (60Hz) XGA (1024x768) Yes (60Hz) WXGA (1280x768) Yes (60Hz) WXGA (1280x720) Yes (60Hz) WXGA (1360x768) Yes (60Hz) SXGA (1280x1024) No

HDMI Input Yes

VGA (640×480) Yes (60Hz) 720×480i (4:3) Yes (60Hz) 720×480i (16:9) Yes (60Hz) 720×480p (4:3) Yes (60Hz) 720×480p (16:9) Yes (60Hz)

Yes Yes

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

720×576i (16:9) Yes (50Hz) 720×576p (4:3) Yes (50Hz) 720×576p (16:9) Yes (50Hz) 1280×720p Yes (50/60Hz)

Component Input Yes

Wall Mount Size W x H(mm) Yes (100 x 100)

Stand Tilt Yes

Features Tray Lock Yes (DVD) WMA No

JPEG Yes Video CD Playback Yes SVCD Playback No MP3 Playback Yes Divx Playback Yes

Digital Out (Dolby Digital) Yes

Down Mix Out (Dolby Digital) Yes

3D Surround No Closed Caption No Screen Saver No Audio DAC 192kHz / 24bit Macrovision Yes

1920×1080i Yes (50/60Hz)

720×480i (4:3) Yes (60Hz) 720×480i (16:9) Yes (60Hz) 720×480p (4:3) Yes (60Hz) 720×480p (16:9) Yes (60Hz) 720×576i (4:3) Yes (50Hz) 720×576i (16:9) Yes (50Hz) 720×576p (4:3) Yes (50Hz) 720×576p (16:9) Yes (50Hz) 1280×720p Yes (50/60Hz) 1920×1080i Yes (50/60Hz)

Screw Size M4 x 10

Swievel No

DMF Support No

(MPEG) Yes (PCM) Yes (DTS) Yes

(DTS) No

A2-4 19DV616DG

Page 29

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

300 ohm to 75 ohm Antenna Adapter

G-13 Accessories Owner's Manual (Full) Language English, French, German

(Simplified)

w/Guarantee Card No

Remote Control Unit Yes Rod Antenna No

Poles Terminal -

Loop Antenna (W/ Antenna Change Plug) No

Terminal -

U/V Mixer No DC Car Cord (Center+) No Guarantee Card No Warning Sheet No Registration Card No Circuit Diagram No Antenna Change Plug No Service Facility List No Important Safeguard No Dew/AHC Caution Sheet No Quick Set-up Sheet Yes My Movie stream (Free DVD redemption voucher) No Carbon Neutral Certificate No Battery Yes

UM size x pcs UM-4 x 2 pcs OEM Brand No

AC Adapter No AC Cord (for AC Adapter) No AC Cord Yes AV Cord (2Pin-1Pin) No RF Cable Yes HDMI-DVI Cable No Helpline Sheet No

Italian, Spanish, Dutch, Danish, Norwegian, Swedish,

Finnish, Czech, Greek

G-14 Interface Switch Side Power (Tact) Yes

Indicator Power/Stand-by/EPG Timer Yes(GREEN / RED / ORANGE)

Terminals Side CI Card Slot Yes

Rear Video Input 1

System Select No Main Power SW No Channel Up / Play / Menu Up Yes Channel Down / STOP / Menu Down Yes Volume Up / Menu> Yes Volume Down / Menu< Yes Play No (CH+ Alternative) Eject Yes Skip+, Search+ No Skip-, Search- No Stop No (CH- Alternative) Input Select / Enter Yes Menu Yes

On Timer No

Audio Input 1 S- Input 1 Yes (AV2) Video Input 2 No Audio Input 2 No S- Input 2 No Video Output No Audio Output No Digital Audio Out (Coaxial) Component In Audio Input (Component In use) Sub Woofer Output No Diversity No Ext Speaker No DC Jack 12V(Center +) No Other Terminal Headphone VHF/UHF Antenna Input AC Inlet Euro Scart (21Pin) PC Monitor Input (D-Sub) Audio Input HDMI Input 1 Audio Input (HDMI/DVI In use) PC Monitor Audio Input Alternative HDMI Input 2 No Audio Input (HDMI/DVI In use) No

RCA x 1 (AV2) RCA x 2(L/MONO, R) (AV2)

Yes RCA x 3 RCA x 2(L/MONO, R)

DIN Type Yes 1Scart (AV1) Yes Mini Pin Jack( 3.5), STEREO Yes

A2-5 19DV616DG

Page 30

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

G-15 Set Size Approx. W x D x H (mm) 476 x 207 x 364

G-16 Weight Net Approx. 5.2kg (11.5lbs)

G-17 Carton Master Carton No

Gift Box Yes

Drop Test 6 Surfaces

Container Stuffing 1140 Sets/40' container w/Pallet Yes w/Wrapping Yes

G-18 Material Cabinet Cabinet Front PS 94V0 NON-DECABROM

PCB Non-Halogen No

G-19 Environment Environmental standard requirement Green procurement of TOSHIBA

Pb- Free Phase3(PHASE3A)

WEEE Yes

w/o Stand,Handle Approx. W x D x H (mm)

Net w/o Stand,Handle Approx. 4.5kg (9.9bs) Gross Approx. 6.9kg (15.2 lbs) Gross w/Master Carton (Approx.) --- kg ( --- lbs)

Content ---- Sets Material -- /-Dimensions W x D x H(mm) -- x -- x -- Description of Origin No

Material Double/Full Color Dimensions W x D x H(mm) 562 x 535 x 181 W/Handle Yes W/Color Photo Label No Description of Origin Yes

Height (cm) 80

Cabinet Rear PS 94V0 NON-DECABROM

Eyelet Yes

Measures for Whisker Yes

476 x 66.8 x 333.2

A2-6 19DV616DG

Page 31

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

CH Coverage

Analog

IreE2~E4,X~Z+2,S1~S10,E5~E12,S11~S41,E21~E69

G-1 TV LCD LCD Size / Visual Size 21.60 inch / 547.7mmV

System LCD Type Color TFT LCD

Color System PAL / SECAM Speaker 2 Speaker

Sound Output MAX 1.5W + 1.5W

NTSC3.58+4.43 /PAL60Hz Yes

G-2 DVD System Color System NTSC, PAL

Disc DVD, Disc Diameter 120 mm , 80 mm Drive DSM-3 Search speed Fwd 4 step

Slow speed Fwd 1/7 -1/2 times

G-3 Tuning Broadcasting System Analog

System Tuner and System 1Tuner (Analog+Digital)

Receive CH Destination UK, I.R., CCIR Hyper+France CATV

Number of Pixels 1366(H) x 768(V)

View Range Left/Right 85/85 degree

Bright Dot n=0 Zero Bright Dot Ratio --

Position Front Size 1.0 x 2.7 inch Impedance 8 ohm

10%(Typical) ---

Rev 4 step

Rev 1/7 -1/2 times

Digital

Up/Down 80/80 degree

Actual 2-45 times (DVD/Video CD)

Actual --

4-40 times (CD)

U.K., DVB-T

Intermediate Analog

Digital E5~E12, ItaD~H2, Fra1~6, Rus6~12, E21~E69

Frequency Picture(FP) 38.9 / 38.9 / 38.9 / 33.9MHz

Sound(FS) FP-FS

Digital Auto Tuning Method Preset CH Analog 99

Digital Carrier 200 / Service 1000 Stereo/Dual TV Sound Nicam/A2 Dual Tuner Sound Muting Yes

G-4 Signal Video Signal Input Level 1 V p-p/75 ohm

Output Level 1 V p-p/75 ohm

S/N Ratio (Weighted) 65dB

Horizontal Resolution at DVD Mode 400 Lines RGB Signal Output Level -Audio Signal Input Level -8.0dBm/50k ohm

Output Level at DVD -12.0dBm/1k ohm (-20dBFs 0dBFs=2.0Vrms)

at TV -8 dBm/1k ohm (0dBm=0.775Vrms) Digital Output Level 0.5 V p-p/75 ohm S/N Ratio at DVD (W eighted) 85dB Harmonic Distortion 0.02% (1KHz) Frequency Response : at DVD 4Hz - 22kHz

at Video CD 4Hz - 20kHz

at SVCD --

at CD 4Hz - 20kHz

G-5 Power Power Source AC 220-240V AC 50Hz

DC ---

Power Consumption at AC 53 W at AC 230 V 50 Hz

at DC --

Stand by (at AC) w/ EPG Timer 5 W at 230V 50Hz

w/o EPG Timer 0.8 W at 230V 50Hz Per Year -- kW h/Year

Protector Power Fuse Yes

G-6 Regulation Safety CE(EN60065:2002+AMD.1:2006)

Radiation CE X-Radiation ---

G-7 Temperature Operation

Storage Space Around Unit 100 mm(4inch)

G-8 Operating Humidity Less than 80% RH

BG / II

33.4 / 32.9 / 32.4 / 40.4MHz

5.5 / 6.0 / 6.5 / 6.5MHz

36.167MHz ALL Band (Not C.C.I.R. CH Plan)

C ~ +40oC

C ~ +60oC

-20

A2-7 22DV616DG

Page 32

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

Yes

G-9 OSD Language (TV) English, Spanish, German, French, Italian,

(DVD) English, Spanish, German, French, Italian

G-10 Clock and Sleep Timer Max Time 120 Min

Timer Step 10 Min

On/Off Timer Program(On Timer / Off Timer) -- Program Wake Up Timer No Timer Back-up (at Power Off Mode) more than -- Min Sec EPG Timer Events 8Programs / 8Days

G-11 Remote Unit RC-QJ

Control Glow in Dark Remocon No

Remocon Format TOSHIBA Format TOSHIBA Custom Code 40-BF h ,44-BB h ,45-BA h ,45-BC h Power Source Voltage(D.C) 3V

UM size x pcs UM-4 x 2 pcs

Total Keys 54 Keys Keys Power (Stand By) Yes

Information/(Display) Yes Analog Menu / Setup Yes Digital Menu Yes Input Select Yes ATV/DTV Yes Guide/(EPG) Yes Picture Size Yes 1Yes 2Yes 3Yes 4Yes 5Yes 6Yes 7Yes

Swedish, Dutch, Russian, Portuguese, Turkish, Greek, Finnish, Polish, Danish, Norwegian

9Yes 0 Yes Sleep Yes Mute Yes Volume Up Yes Volume Down Yes

T'TEXT Keys TEXT / TV Yes

HOLD / Skip- Yes Reveal / Search- Yes Sub Page / Search+ Yes F.T.B / Skip+ Yes Red / Slow- Yes Green / Pause Yes Yellow / Play Mode Yes Cyan / Slow+ Yes CH Up / Page Up Yes CH Down / Page Down Yes

Yes Yes Yes Yes

A2-8 22DV616DG

Page 33

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

Surround

G-12 Features Power On Memory Yes

Auto Shut Off Yes Just Clock Function No Game Position No DNR Yes

Comb Filter Yes

Auto Set Up (Fast installation) Auto tuning (Analog tuner) Yes

CH sort Yes

ATS Yes Auto clock (Analog tuner) No Plug in start Yes

Picture Setting(TV) Picture Preference Yes

Brightness , Contrast , Color Yes Tint Yes Sharpness Yes DNR No Color Temperature Yes Blue Back Yes Backlight Control Yes DBC (Dynamic Backlight Control) No Film Mode No

Picture Setting(PC) BRIGHTNESS , CONTRAST Yes

HOR POSITION , VER POSITION Yes PHASE , CLOCK Yes AUTO ADJUST No RED , GREEN , BLUE Yes Backlight Yes WXGA INPUT Yes WVGA INPUT No

Audio Nicam Yes

Tone Control (Bass/Treble/Balance) Yes

BBE No SRS WOW (SRS 3D/Focus/Tru Bass) No

Tuning Auto Tuning Yes

Lock (Analog) Panel Lock No

Screen Saver

Black Side Panel No CH Label Yes T'Text Yes

Scart2 AV in No

Variable Audio Out No

Manual Tuning Yes CH Allocation Yes

Channel Lock No Hotel Lock Yes Inversion No Full W hit e No Screen Saver No Static Image No

Text type Fastext / Toptext Text Language English , French, Swedish, Hungarian

Turkish, German, Portuguese, Spanish, Italian, Greek, Slovakian, Russian, Polish, Czech, Rumanian, Estonian, Lettish, Lithuanian, Ukrainian, Croatian, Slovenian, Latvian

AV out Yes (A.Tuner/D.Tuner/Monitor) S-Video in No RGB in Yes

AV out No S-Video in No RGB in No

A2-9 22DV616DG

Page 34

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

720×576i (4:3)

Yes (50Hz)

HDMI Input Yes

VGA (640×480) Yes (60Hz) 720×480i (4:3) Yes (60Hz) 720×480i (16:9) Yes (60Hz) 720×480p (4:3) Yes (60Hz) 720×480p (16:9) Yes (60Hz)

Yes Yes

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

720×576i (16:9) Yes (50Hz) 720×576p (4:3) Yes (50Hz) 720×576p (16:9) Yes (50Hz) 1280×720p Yes (50/60Hz)

Component Input Yes

Wall Mount Size W x H(mm) Yes (100 x 100)

Stand Tilt Yes

Features Tray Lock Yes (DVD) WMA No

JPEG Yes Video CD Playback Yes SVCD Playback No MP3 Playback Yes Divx Playback Yes

Digital Out (Dolby Digital) Yes

Down Mix Out (Dolby Digital) Yes

3D Surround No Closed Caption No Screen Saver No Audio DAC 192kHz / 24bit Macrovision Yes

1920×1080i Yes (50/60Hz)

Screw Size M4 x 10

Swievel No

DMF Support No

(MPEG) Yes (PCM) Yes (DTS) Yes

(DTS) No

A2-10 22DV616DG

Page 35

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

300 ohm to 75 ohm Antenna Adapter

G-13 Accessories Owner's Manual (Full) Language English, French, German

(Simplified)

w/Guarantee Card No

Remote Control Unit Yes Rod Antenna No

Poles Terminal -

Loop Antenna (W/ Antenna Change Plug) No

Terminal -

UM size x pcs UM-4 x 2 pcs OEM Brand No

AC Adapter No AC Cord (for AC Adapter) No AC Cord Yes AV Cord (2Pin-1Pin) No RF Cable Yes HDMI-DVI Cable No Helpline Sheet No

Italian, Spanish, Dutch, Danish, Norwegian, Swedish,

Finnish, Czech, Greek

G-14 Interface Switch Side Power (Tact) Yes

Indicator Power/Stand-by/EPG Timer Yes(GREEN / RED / ORANGE)

Terminals Side CI Card Slot Yes

Rear Video Input 1

On Timer No

RCA x 1 (AV2) RCA x 2(L/MONO, R) (AV2)

Yes Yes RCA x 2(L/MONO, R)

DIN Type Yes 1Scart (AV1) Yes Mini Pin Jack( 3.5), STEREO Yes

A2-11 22DV616DG

Page 36

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

G-15 Set Size Approx. W x D x H (mm) 550.0 x 207.0 x 407.1

G-16 Weight Net Approx. 5.4kg (11.9lbs)

G-17 Carton Master Carton No

Gift Box Yes

Drop Test 6 Surfaces

Container Stuffing 984 Sets/40' container w/Pallet Yes w/Wrapping Yes

G-18 Material Cabinet Cabinet Front PS 94V0 NON-DECABROM

PCB Non-Halogen No

G-19 Environment Environmental standard requirement Green procurement of TOSHIBA

Pb- Free Phase3(PHASE3A)

WEEE Yes

w/o Stand,Handle Approx. W x D x H (mm)

Net w/o Stand,Handle Approx. 4.8kg (10.6lbs) Gross Approx. 7.6kg (16.7 lbs) Gross w/Master Carton (Approx.) --- kg ( --- lbs)

Content ---- Sets Material -- /-Dimensions W x D x H(mm) -- x -- x -- Description of Origin No

Material Double/Full Color Dimensions W x D x H(mm) 622 x 575 x 181 W/Handle Yes W/Color Photo Label No Description of Origin Yes

Height (cm) 80

Cabinet Rear PS 94V0 NON-DECABROM

Eyelet Yes

Measures for Whisker Yes

550.0 x 66.8 x 376.2

A2-12 22DV616DG

Page 37

DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS

1. REMOVAL OF MECHANICAL PARTS AND P.C. BOARDS

CAUTION

Be careful not to remove the FFC cable forcibly, because the FFC cable may be damaged.

1-1: STAND ASS'Y (Refer to Fig. 1-1)

1. Remove the 2 screws (1).

2. Remove the Stand Ass'y in the direction of arrow.

(1)

Stand Ass'y

1-3: FRONT CABINET ASS'Y and LCD PANEL

(Refer to Fig. 1-3)

1. Turn up set and put the Front Cabinet Ass'y of LCD on the top.

2. Remove the Front Cabinet Ass'y in the direction of arrow (A).

Disconnect the following connector: (CD7201).

4. Remove the LCD Panel in the direction of arrow (B).

Front Cabinet Ass'y

(A)

Fig. 1-1

1-2: COVER INVERTER (Refer to Fig. 1-2)

1. Remove the screw (1).

2. Remove the Cover Inverter in the direction of arrow (A).

3. Disconnect the following connectors:

(CP7001 and CP7002).

4. Unlock the support (2).

5. Remove the Cover AC in the direction of arrow (B).

6. Remove the 10 screws (3).

(1)

Cover Inverter

(3)

(A)

(3)

Cover AC

(2)

(B)

(3)

CD7201

(LVDS Cable)

LCD Panel

(B)

CP7001

CP7002

Fig. 1-2

Back Cabinet Ass'y

Fig. 1-3

B1-1 19DV616DG

Page 38

DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS

DVD Deck Ass y

1-4: DVD MT PCB and DVD DECK (Refer to Fig. 1-4) 1-5: POWER PCB and REMOCON PCB (Refer to Fig. 1-5)

1. Put the Back Cabinet Ass'y on the bottom. 1. Remove the 2 screws (1).

Short circuit the position shown in Fig. 1-4 using a soldering iron. If you remove the DVD Deck with no 3. Remove the 6 screws (2). soldering, the Laser may be damaged. 4. Disconnect the following connector:

3. Disconnect the following connectors:

(CP2301, CP2302, CP2305, CP8501 and CP8502).

4. Remove the 3 screws (1). 6.

5. Remove the DVD DECK Ass'y in the direction of 7. Remove the screw (3). arrow (A). 8. Remove the Remocon PCB in the direction of arrow (C).

6. Remove the 2 screws (2).

7. Remove the Shield LVDS in the direction of arrow (B).

8. Unlock the 2 supports (3).

9. Remove the DVD MT PCB in the direction of arrow (C).

(2)

Shield LVDS

CP2302

CP8502 CP8501

DVD MT PCB

(B)

(C)

(1)

CP2305

CP2301

(3)

(1)

Pick Up PCB

(1)

2. Remove the Plate PCB in the direction of arrow (A).

(CP501 and CP8101).

5. Remove the Power PCB in the direction of arrow (B).

Disconnect the following connector: (CP7601).

(1)

(2)

Power PCB

(2)

CP501

(B)

(A)

CP8101

Plate PCB

Remocon PCB

(3)

(C)

CP7601

(A)

Short circuit using a

Back Cabinet Ass'y

soldering iron.

1-6: MAIN PCB and TUNER PCB (Refer to Fig. 1-6)

Back Cabinet Ass'y

Fig. 1-4

1. Remove the 2 screws (1).

Disconnect the following connector: (CP5803).

3. Remove the Tuner PCB in the direction of arrow (A).

NOTE

4. Remove the 4 screws (2).

5. Disconnect the following connector:

1. Before your operation, please read "PREPARATION

(CP2201 and CP5801).

OF SERVICING". 6. Remove the Main PCB in the direction of arrow (B).

2. Use the Lead Free solder.

3. Manual soldering conditions

• Solderin

temperature: 320 ± 2

• Soldering time: Within 3 seconds

• Soldering combination: Sn-3.0Ag-0.5Cu

4. When Soldering/Removing of solder, use the drawing equipment over the Pick Up Unit to keep the Flux smoke away from it.

5. When installing the DVD Deck, remove all the soldering on the short circuit position after the connection of Pick

Tuner PCB

Mian PCB

(2)

(1)

(A)

(2)

Up PCB and DVD MT PCB connector.

(B)

CP5801

CP2201

Fig. 1-5

CP5803

Back Cabinet Ass'y

Fig. 1-6

B1-2 19DV616DG

Page 39

DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS

1-7: DIGITAL PCB (Refer to Fig. 1-7)

1. Remove the 2 screws (1).

2. Remove the Digital PCB in the direction of arrow (A).

3. Remove the 2 screws (2). Remove the Shield CI Card Bottom Ass'y in the direction

4. of arrow (B).

5. Remove the Shield CI Card Top in the direction of arrow (C).

(2)

(1)

Shield CI Card Bottom Ass'y

(B)

Digital PCB

(A)

(2)

Shield CI Card Top

(C)

Back Cabinet Ass'y

Fig. 1-7

1-8: OPERATION PCB (Refer to Fig. 1-8)

1. Push 9 supports (1).

2. Remove the Panel Side Ass'y in the direction of arrow (A).

3. Remove the 2 screws (2).

4. Remove the Operation PCB in the direction of arrow (B).

Back Cabinet Ass'y

Operation PCB

(2)

(B)

(A)

(1)

Panel Side Ass'y

Fig. 1-8

B1-3 19DV616DG

Page 40

DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS

1. REMOVAL OF MECHANICAL PARTS

AND P.C. BOARDS

CAUTION

Be careful not to remove the FFC cable forcibly, because the FFC cable may be damaged.

1-1: STAND ASS'Y (Refer to Fig. 1-1)

1. Remove the 2 screws (1).

2. Remove the Stand Ass'y in the direction of arrow (A).

3. Unlock the 2 support (2).

4. Remove the Cover LVDS in the direction of arrow (B).

Disconnect the following connector: (CP7202).

Stand Ass'y

(2)

Cover LVDS

(B)

(1)

(A)

FFC Cable

1-3: FRONT CABINET ASS'Y and LCD PANEL

(Refer to Fig. 1-3)

1. Turn up set and put the Front Cabinet Ass'y of LCD on the top.

2. Remove the Front Cabinet Ass'y in the direction of arrow (A).

3. Remove the LCD Panel in the direction of arrow (B).

Front Cabinet Ass'y

(A)

CP7202

Connector

1-2: COVER INVERTER (Refer to Fig. 1-2)

1. Remove the screw (1).

2. Remove the Cover Inverter in the direction of arrow.

3. Disconnect the following connectors:

(CP7001, CP7002, CP7003 and CP7004).

4. Remove the 8 screws (2).

5. Remove the 2 screws (3).

(1)

Cover Inverter

(2)

(3)

(2)

LCD Panel

(B)

Fig. 1-1

Back Cabinet Ass'y

Fig. 1-3

(2)

CP7001

CP7003

CP7002

CP7004

Fig. 1-2

B1-4 22DV616DG

Page 41

DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS

DVD Deck Ass'y

1-4: DVD MT PCB and DVD DECK (Refer to Fig. 1-4) 1-5: POWER PCB and REMOCON PCB (Refer to Fig. 1-5)

1. Put the Back Cabinet Ass'y on the bottom. 1. Remove the 2 screws (1).

3. Disconnect the following connectors:

(CP2301, CP2302, CP2305, CP8501 and CP8502).

4. Remove the 3 screws (1). 6.

5. Remove the DVD DECK Ass'y in the direction of 7. Remove the screw (3). arrow (A). 8. Remove the Remocon PCB in the direction of arrow (C).

6. Remove the 2 screws (2).

7. Remove the Shield LVDS in the direction of arrow (B).

8. Unlock the 2 supports (3).

9. Remove the DVD MT PCB in the direction of arrow (C).

(2)

Shield LVDS

CP2302

CP8502

CP8501

DVD MT PCB

(B)

(C)

(1)

CP2305 CP2301

(3)

(1)

2. Remove the Plate PCB in the direction of arrow (A).

(CP501 and CP8101).

5. Remove the Power PCB in the direction of arrow (B).

Disconnect the following connector: (CP7601).

(1)

(B)

(2)

(1)

(A)

CP501

Plate PCB

CP8101

Remocon PCB

(3)

(C)

CP7601

(2)

Power PCB

(2)

(A)

Short circuit using a

Back Cabinet Ass'y

soldering iron.

1-6: MAIN PCB and TUNER PCB (Refer to Fig. 1-6)

Back Cabinet Ass'y

Fig. 1-4

1. Remove the 2 screws (1).

Disconnect the following connector: (CP5803).

3. Remove the Tuner PCB in the direction of arrow (A).

NOTE

4. Remove the 4 screws (2).

5. Disconnect the following connector:

1. Before your operation, please read "PREPARATION

(CP2201 and CP5801).

OF SERVICING". 6. Remove the Main PCB in the direction of arrow (B).

2. Use the Lead Free solder.

3. Manual soldering conditions

• Solderin

temperature: 320 ± 2

• Soldering time: Within 3 seconds

Tuner PCB

(1)

• Soldering combination: Sn-3.0Ag-0.5Cu

4. When Soldering/Removing of solder, use the drawing equipment over the Pick Up Unit to keep the Flux smoke away from it.

5. When installing the DVD Deck, remove all the soldering

Mian PCB

(2)

(A)

(2)

on the short circuit position after the connection of Pick Up PCB and DVD MT PCB connector.

(B)

CP5801

CP2201

Fig. 1-5

CP5803

Back Cabinet Ass'y

Fig. 1-6

B1-5 22DV616DG

Page 42

DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS

1-7: DIGITAL PCB (Refer to Fig. 1-7)

1. Remove the 2 screws (1).

2. Remove the Digital PCB in the direction of arrow (A).

3. Remove the 2 screws (2). Remove the Shield CI Card Bottom Ass'y in the direction

4. of arrow (B).

5. Remove the Shield CI Card Top in the direction of arrow (C).

(1)

(2)

(1)

Shield CI Card Bottom Ass'y

(B)

Digital PCB

(A)

(2)

Shield CI Card Top

(C)

Back Cabinet Ass'y

Fig. 1-7

1-8: OPERATION PCB (Refer to Fig. 1-8)

1. Push 9 supports (1).

2. Remove the Panel Side Ass'y in the direction of arrow (A).

3. Remove the 2 screws (2).

4. Remove the Operation PCB in the direction of arrow (B).

Back Cabinet Ass'y

(A)

(1)

Fig. 1-8

Operation PCB

Panel Side Ass'y

(2)

(B)

B1-6 22DV616DG

Page 43

DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS

7.Remove the PCB630

2. REMOVAL OF DVD DECK PART

NOTE

1. Disassemble only the DVD DECK PARTS parts listed here. Minute adjustments are needed if the disassembly is done. If the repair is needed except listed parts, replace the DVD MECHA ASS'Y.

2-1: TRAVERSE ASS'Y/LOADING MOTOR PCB ASS'Y/ PLATE TRVS UD (Refer to Fig. 2-1-A)

1. Remove the screw (1).

2. Remove the screw (2).

3. Unlock the 5 supports (3).

4. Remove the Insulator (R) from the Loader Ass'y.

5. Remove the Traverse Ass'y and Plate Trvs Ud.

(1)

Insulator (R)

Traverse Ass'y

(3)

(2)

(3)

Plate TRVS UD

Loader Sub Ass'y

Check Lock

2.2: HOLDER TRAVERSE/INSULATOR (F)/ INSULATOR (R)/FEED RACK ASS'Y/ PCB630/GEAR MIDDLE/GEAR FEED/ FEED MOTOR/GEAR MOTOR (Refer to Fig. 2-2-A)

1. Remove the Holder Traverse.

2. Remove the Insulator (F).

3. Remove the Insulator (R).

4. Remove the screw (1).

5. Remove the Feed Rack Ass'y.

6. Remove the screw (2).

7. Remove the PCB630.

8. Unlock the support (3).

9. Remove the Gear Middle.

10. Remove the screw (4).

11. Remove the Gear Feed.

12. Remove the 2 screws (5).

13. Remove the Feed Motor.

14. Remove the Gear Motor.

Fig. 2-1-C

• Screw Torque: 1.0 ± 0.3kgf•cm (screw(1))

• Screw Torque: 3.0 ± 0.3kgf•cm (screw(2))

Fig. 2-1-A

NOTE

1. In case of the Traverse Ass'y installation, hook the wire on the Loader Ass'y as shown Fig. 2-1-B to Fig. 2-1-C.

Loader Ass'y (Top side)

Check Lock

(4)

Gear Feed

(2)

PCB 630

Insulator (F)

Holder Traverse

• Screw Torque: 1.3 ± 0.3kgf•cm (Screw (1))

• Screw Torque: 3.0 ± 0.3kgf•cm (Screw (2))

• Screw Torque: 1.0 ± 0.3kgf•cm (Screw (4), (5))

(3)

Insulator (F)

Feed Rack Ass'y

(5)

Traverse Ass'y

Gear Motor

Gear Middle

(1)

Insulator (R)

Feed Motor

Fig. 2-2-A

Check Lock

Fig. 2-1-B

19DV616DG/22DV616DG

B2-1

19DV616DG/22DV616DG

Page 44

(

)

DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS

GEAR WORM/RACK LEVER (Refer to Fig.2-3-A)

Safety surface for pressing of the insert

NOTE

Insulator (R)

1. In case of the Gear Motor installation, check if the value of the Fig. 2-2-B is correct.

2. When installing the wire of the PCB630 install it correctly as Fig. 2-2-C. Manual soldering conditions

• Solderin

• Soldering time: Within 4 seconds

• Soldering combination: Sn-3.0Ag-0.5Cu

3. When installing the Feed Rack Ass'y, push both ends to

temperature: 350 ± 5oC

Traverse Ass'y

Check Hook

align the teeth as shown Fig. 2-2-D. Then install it.

4. In case of the Insulator (F) installation, install correctly as Fig. 2-2-E.

5. In case of the Insulator (R) installation, install correctly as Fig. 2-2-F.

6. After the assembly of the Traverse Ass'y, hook the wire on the Traverse Ass'y as shown Fig. 2-2-G.

• Loosen the wire in the direction of the arrow.

8.0 ± 0.2mm

Gear Motor

Feed Motor

2.3: GEAR ROLLER/LUMIRROR WASHER/ ROLLER CONE/SHAFT ROLLER/ LOADING MOTOR PCB/LOADING MOTOR/

Fig. 2-2-B

GEAR WORM/RACK LEVER

1. Remove the 3 screws (1).

2. Remove the Chassis Main Ass'y.

PCB630

~FEED MOTOR~

WHITE(4)

BROWN(3)

3. Remove the Roller Ass'y.

4. Remove the Gear Roller.

5. Remove the Lumirror Washer.

6. Remove the Roller Cone.

7. Remove the Shaft Roller .

• Install wire from (1) to (4) in order. 8. Remove the screw (2).

9. Remove the Loading Motor PCB Ass'y.

10. Remove the screw (3).

11. Remove the Loading Motor.

12. Remove the Gear Worm.

~FEED MOTOR~

YELLOW(2)

GREEN(1)

Fig. 2-2-C

13. Remove the Rack Lever.

Traverse Ass'y (Top Side)

Fig. 2-2-F

Check Hook

Fig. 2-2-G

Refer to Fig. 2-3-A

Feed Rack Ass'y

Push

(OK) (NG)

Insulator (F)

Holder Traverse

Push

Fig. 2-2-D

Fig. 2-2-E

B2-2

19DV616DG/22DV616DG

Page 45

))

DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS

Screw Torque: 3.0±0.3kgf cm (Screw (1))

Loading Motor PCB Ass'y

(2)

Lumirror Washer

Roller Cone

Shaft Roller

Frame Main Ass'y

(1)

• Screw Torque: 3.0 ± 0.3kgf•cm(Screw(1

• Screw Torque: 0.8 ± 0.3kgf•cm (Screw (2))

• Screw Torque: 1.0 ± 0.3kgf•cm (Screw (3))

Rack Lever

Roller Cone

(1)

Loading Motor

Gear Worm

(3)

Chassis Main Ass'y

Lumirror Washer

Gear Roller

(1)

Fig. 2-3-A

Loading Motor PCB Ass'y

• Install wire from (1) to (2) in order.

RED(2)

BLACK(1)

Roller Sub Ass'y

(OK) (NG)

Roller Sub Ass'y

Safety surface for

pressing of the insert.

(OK) (NG)

Fig. 2-3-C

Fig. 2-3-D

NOTE

1. In case of the Gear Worm installation, check if the value of the Fig. 2-3-B is correct.

2. When installing the wire of the Loading Motor PCB Ass'y, install it correctly as Fig. 2-2-C. Manual soldering conditions

• Solderin

temperature: 350 ± 5oC

• Soldering time: Within 4 seconds

• Soldering combination: Sn-3.0Ag-0.5Cu

3. In case of the Roller Cone installation, install correctly as Fig. 2-3-D.

4. In case of the Lumirror Washer installation, install correctly as Fig. 2-3-E.

5. In case of the Gear Roller installation, check if the value of the Fig. 2-3-F is correct.

6. After the assembly of the Loader Sub Ass'y, hook the wire on the Loader Sub Ass'y as shown Fig. 2-3-G.

Gear Worm

14.3 + 0, - 0.1mm

Loading Motor

Safety surface for pressing of the insert.

Fig. 2-3-B

Roller Sub Ass'y

1.8 + 0, - 0.1mm

Loader Sub Ass'y

Check Hook

Fig. 2-3-E

Fig. 2-3-F

Check Hook

Fig. 2-3-G

19DV616DG/22DV616DG

B2-3

19DV616DG/22DV616DG

Page 46

DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS

2.4: SPRING SHUTTER/PLATE RETAINER/

RETAINER SHUTTER/COVER CLAMPER/ PLATE CLAMPER/MAGNET CLAMPER/ CLAMPER/GUIDE DISC/LEVER DISC/ SPRING LEVER GUIDE/SPRING LEVER DISC/ LEVER DISC (Refer to Fig. 2-4-A)

1. Unlock the support (1).

2. Remove the Retainer Shutter Ass'y.

3. Remove the Spring Shutter.

4. Remove the 3 screws (2).

5. Remove the Plate Retainer.

6. Remove the Retainer Shutter.

7. Unlock the 2 supports (3).

8. Remove the Cover Clamper.

9. Unlock the 3 supports (4).

10. Remove the Plate Clamper.

11. Remove the Magnet Clamper.

12. Remove the Clamper.

13. Unlock the support (5).

14. Remove the Guide Disc.

15. Remove the Lever Guide.

16. Remove the Spring Lever Guide.

17. Remove the Spring Lever Disc.

18. Remove the Lever Disc.

Spring Shutter (2pcs)

Retainer Shutter

(OK) (NG)

Check Hook

Clamper Ass'y

Frame Main Ass'y

Fig. 2-4-B

Spring Shutter

Retainer Shutter

Guide Disc

(2)

Plate Retainer

Clamper

Magnet Clamper

Plate Clamper

Cover Clamper

• Screw Torque: 0.7 ± 0.3kgf•cm (Screw (2))

(2)

(3)

(4)

Spring Lever Disc

(5)

Frame Mian

Spring Lever Guide

(1)

Lever Guide

Lever Disc

Fig. 2-4-A

NOTE

1. In case of the Retainer Shutter Ass'y installation, check if the value of the Fig. 2-4-B is correct.

2. In case of the Clamper Ass'y installation, check if the value of the Fig. 2-4-C is correct.

Check Hook

Fig. 2-4-C

2-5: FFC WIRE HANDLING

1. When installing the FFC, fold it correctly and install it as shown from Fig. 2-5-A to Fig. 2-5-D.

NOTE

1. Do not make the folding lines except the specified positions for the FFC.

[ 24 pin FFC ]

Printing Surface

35 ± 1mm

Fold

Fig. 2-5-A

B2-4

19DV616DG/22DV616DG

Page 47

Install the position (A) and (B)

[ 4 pin FFC ]

71 ± 1mm

Fold it by 90°

DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS

(A)

(B)

Fig. 2-5-B

Printing Surface

Fig. 2-5-C

[ 5 pin FFC ]

Printing Surface

25 ± 1mm Fold it by 90°

Fold it by 90° 15 ± 1mm

10 ± 1mm

16 ± 1mm

Fig. 2-5-D

B2-5

19DV616DG/22DV616DG

Page 48

DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS

3. REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF FLAT PACKAGE IC

3. When IC starts moving back and forth easily after desoldering completely, pickup the corner of the IC usin tweezers and remove the IC by moving with the IC

REMOVAL desoldering machine. (Refer to Fig. 3-3.)

1. Put Masking Tape (cotton tape) around the Flat Package

NOTE

IC to protect other parts from any damage.

(Refer to Fig. 3-1.)

Some ICs on the PCB are affixed with glue, so be careful not to break or damage the foil of each IC

NOTE

leads or solder lands under the IC when removing it.

Masking is carried out on all the parts located within 10 mm distance from IC leads.

Masking Tape (Cotton Tape)

Tweezers

Blower type IC

desoldering machine

Fig. 3-1

2. Heat the IC leads using a blower type IC desoldering

machine. (Refer to Fig. 3-2.)

NOTE

Do not rotate or move the IC back and forth , until IC 4. Peel off the Masking Tape. can move back and forth easily after desoldering the leads completely. 5. Absorb the solder left on the pattern using the Braided

Shield Wire. (Refer to Fig. 3-4.)

Blower type IC

desoldering machine

NOTE

Do not move the Braided Shield Wire in the vertical direction towards the IC pattern.

Braided Shield Wire

Soldering Iron

Fig. 3-2

IC pattern

Fig. 3-3

Fig. 3-4

B3-1 19DV616DG/22DV616DG

Page 49

DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS

iti

fth

dth

damaged.So,always be sure to replace the IC in this

INSTALLATION

4. When bridge-soldering between terminals and/or the soldering amount are not enough, resolder using a

1. Take care of the polarity of new IC and then install the

Thintip Soldering Iron. (Refer to Fig. 3-8.)

new IC fitting on the printed circuit pattern. Then solder each lead on the diagonal positions of IC temporarily.

(Refer to Fig. 3-5.)

Thin-tip Soldering Iron

Soldering Iron

Fig. 3-8

5. Finally, confirm the soldering status on four sides of the IC using a magnifying glass. Confirm that no abnormality is found on the soldering

Solder temporarily

Fig. 3-5

on andinstallation pos

IC. If some abnormality is found, correct by resoldering.

NOTE

on o

e parts aroun

pos

2. Supply the solder from the upper position of IC leads When the IC leads are bent during soldering and/or sliding to the lower position of the IC leads. repairing, do not repair the bending of leads. If the

(Refer to Fig. 3-6.)

bending of leads are repaired, the pattern may be

case.

Solder

Soldering Iron

Supply soldering

from upper position to lower position

Fig. 3-6

3. Absorb the solder left on the lead using the Braided Shield Wire. (Refer to Fig. 3-7.)

NOTE

Do not absorb the solder to excess.

Soldering Iron

Braided Shield Wire

Fig. 3-7

B3-2 19DV616DG/22DV616DG

Page 50

SERVICE MODE LIS

This unit is provided with the following SERVICE MODES so you can repair, examine and adjust easily.

To enter to the SERVICE MODE function, press and hold both buttons simultaneously on the main unit and on the remote control for more than a the standard time in the appropriate condition. (See below chart.)

Set

Condition

TV mode 1 2 sec. NOTE: If you set factory initialization, the memories are reset such

ALL mode

DTV mode

DVD mode VOL. DOWN

(No disc) (Minimum)

DVD mode VOL. DOWN DVD Write mode.

(No disc) (Minimum) Refer to the "RE-WRITE FOR DVD FIRMWARE".

ALL mode 6 2 sec. Can be checked of the INITIAL DATA of MEMORY IC.

TV mode

Set Key

VOL. DOWN

(Minimum)

VOL. DOWN Check of the SUM DATA and MICON VERSION on the screen.

(Minimum) Refer to the "WHEN REPLACING EEPROM (MEMORY) IC".

VOL. DOWN Releasing of PARENTAL LOCK (DIGITAL).

(Minimum) Refer to the "PARENTAL CONTROL- RATING LEVEL".

VOL. DOWN

(Minimum)

VOL. DOWN Releasing of HOTEL MODE FUNCTION.

(Minimum) Refer to the "HOTEL MODE FUNCTION".

Remocon

Key

4 2 sec. Initialization of factory DVD data.

5 2 sec.

7 2 sec.

Standard

Time

2 sec.

Operations

Initialization of factory TV data.

as the channel setting, and the POWER ON total hours.

POWER ON total hours are displayed on the screen.

Refer to the "WHEN REPLACING EEPROM (MEMORY) IC".

ALL mode 9 2 sec. Refer to the "ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENT"

DVD mode

(No disc)

DVD mode Releasing of PARENTAL LOCK.

(No disc) Refer to the "PARENTAL CONTROL - RATING LEVEL".

Press the following remocon keys continuously. SETUP --->SUBTITLE ---> 3 ---> AUDIO SELECT ---> 0

VOL. DOWN

(Minimum)

STOP

STOP 7 2 sec.

Method Operations

1 2 sec. Refer to the "RE-WRITE FOR DVD FIRMWARE".

Display of the Adjustment MENU on the screen.

(On-Screen Display Adjustment).

Check of the firmware version.

NOTE: Do not use this for normal servicing.

The disk cannot be taken out. Refer to the "TRAY LOCK".

C-1 19DV616DG/22DV616DG

Page 51

SERVICING FIXTURES AND TOOLS

NOTE: Do not turn off the unit on the way or operate the keys on the unit and remocon

JG176 Up-Date Disc Ref. No. Part No. Parts Name

JG176 APJG176148 Up-Date Disc

Up-Date of the Firmware

Remarks

RE-WRITE FOR DVD FIRMWARE

1. Turn on the power, and set the DVD mode.

2. Confirm that the "No Disc" will be appeared on the screen.

Press both VOL. DOWN button on the set and Channel button (5) on the remote control for more than 2 seconds.

4. Press VOL. UP/DOWN button on the unit to check if all the keys on the unit do not function.

NOTE: To check if DVD Write mode is set.

When inserting Up-Date Disc at Non DVD Write mode, the read error will happen.

Insert the Up-Date Disc. (Refer to SERVICING FIXTURE AND TOOLS)

6. Automatic read will start and "Firmware upgrade Please Wait" will be displayed on the screen.

At this time, the horizontal noise lines may appear. But no problem.

Up-Date error will happen and can not be done with the Up-Date of Up-Date Disc.

7. After the Up-Date, Logo screen will appear.

8. Unplug the AC cord, then plug it in.

After the write, set to the initializing of shipping.

9. Turn on the power, and set the DVD mode.

Press both VOL. DOWN button on the set and Channel button (4) on the remote control for more than 2 seconds. The "INITIALIZE 5 ---> COMPLETE" will appear on the screen.

Then unplug the AC cord, and plug it in.

CHECK FOR THE FIRMWARE VERSION

Turn on the power, and set the DVD mode.

12 13

Press both Channel button (1) on the remote control and the STOP button on the set for more than 2 seconds. Firmware version will be displayed on the top left of the screen.

F/W Ver. ADNSL9216A Initialize: Complete

Laser drive time DVD LD: 0Hour CD LD : 0Hour

A D N S L 9 2 1 6 A

Fixed Released times on the same date

Release date (Example: 2009.2.16)

X=October Y=November Z=December

When the changed version displays, the Re-write will be completed.

Turn off the power

C-2 19DV616DG/22DV616DG

Page 52

)

WHEN REPLACING EEPROM (MEMORY) IC

CONFIRMATION OF CHECK SUM, POWER ON TOTAL HOURS AND MICON VERSION

Initial total of MEMORY IC, POWER ON total hours and MICON VERSION can be checked on the screen. Total hours ar displayed in 16 system of notation.

NOTE: If you set a factory initialization, the total hours is reset to "0".

Please refer to "CONFIRMATION OF INITIAL DATA" when SUM DATA is not corresponding

1. Turn on the POWER, and set to the ALL mode.

2. Set the VOLUME to minimum.

3. Press both VOL. DOWN button on the set and Channel button (2) on the remote control for more than 2 seconds.

4. After the confirmation of each check sum, turn off the power.

NOTE: The each item value might be different according to each set.

Version Hardware version 51.01 Digital TV Hardware version Loader version 1.0 Digital TV Loader version. Software version CB03C92051 Digital TV MICON Firmware version.

Ente

Initial setting data check sum. INIT : 5BA5

SCALER data check sum. VCT-P : B7AB LCD ON : 0000 POWER ON total hours.

EEPROM check Version. EEPROM : W52P01CM00 = (16 x 16 x 16 x thousands digit value

Main Micon check Version. ANALOG M : DB240_90306

Sub Micon check Version. ANALOG S : DB210_81219

FIG. 1

Exi

+ (16 x 16 x hundreds digit value + (16 x tens digit value + (ones digit value)

CONFIRMATION OF INITIAL DAT

If a service repair is undertaken where it has been required to change the MEMORY IC, the following steps should b taken to ensure correct data settings while making reference to INITIAL SETTING TABLE (Attached "INITIAL DATA")

1. Turn on the POWER, and set to the ALL mode.

2. Set the VOLUME to minimum.

3. Press both VOL. DOWN button on the set and Channel button (6) on the remote control for more than 2 seconds.

ADDRESS and DATA should appear as FIG 2

NOTE: No need to set data other position than 0D00~0E3F and 1000~7FFF

ADDRESS DATA

INIT 0000 00 LCD ON

ANALOG M : DB240_90306 ANALOG S : DB210_81219

0000

FIG. 2

4. ADDRESS is now selected and should "blink". Using the UP/DOWN buton on the remote, step through th

ADDRESS until required ADDRESS to be changed is reached

5. Press LEFT/RIGHT button to select DATA. When DATA is selected, it will "blink".

6. Again, step through the DATA using UP/DOWN button until required DATA value has been selected

7. Pressing LEFT/RIGHT button will take you back to ADDRESS for further selection if necessary.

8. Repeat steps 4 to 6 until all data has been checked.

9. When satisfied correct DATA has been entered, turn POWER off (return to STANDBY MODE) to finish DATA input.

After the data input, set to the initializing of shipping.

10. Turn on the Power.

11. Set the VOLUME to minimum.

12. Press both VOL. DOWN button on the set and Channel button (1) on the remote control for more than 2 seconds

13. After the finishing of the initializing of shipping, the unit will turn off automatically.

The unit will now have the correct DATA for the new MEMORY IC.

C-3 19DV616DG

Page 53

)

WHEN REPLACING EEPROM (MEMORY) IC

CONFIRMATION OF CHECK SUM, POWER ON TOTAL HOURS AND MICON VERSION

Initial total of MEMORY IC, POWER ON total hours and MICON VERSION can be checked on the screen. Total hours ar displayed in 16 system of notation.

NOTE: If you set a factory initialization, the total hours is reset to "0".

Please refer to "CONFIRMATION OF INITIAL DATA" when SUM DATA is not corresponding

1. Turn on the POWER, and set to the ALL mode.

2. Set the VOLUME to minimum.

3. Press both VOL. DOWN button on the set and Channel button (2) on the remote control for more than 2 seconds.

4. After the confirmation of each check sum, turn off the power.

NOTE: The each item value might be different according to each set.

Version Hardware version 51.01 Digital TV Hardware version Loader version 1.0 Digital TV Loader version. Software version CB03C92051 Digital TV MICON Firmware version.

Ente

Initial setting data check sum. INIT : 5BE1

SCALER data check sum. VCT-P : AB32 LCD ON : 0000 POWER ON total hours.

EEPROM check Version. EEPROM : W52Q01AM00 = (16 x 16 x 16 x thousands digit value

Main Micon check Version. ANALOG M : DB240_90306

Sub Micon check Version. ANALOG S : DB210_81219

FIG. 1

Exi

+ (16 x 16 x hundreds digit value + (16 x tens digit value + (ones digit value)

CONFIRMATION OF INITIAL DAT

1. Turn on the POWER, and set to the ALL mode.

2. Set the VOLUME to minimum.

3. Press both VOL. DOWN button on the set and Channel button (6) on the remote control for more than 2 seconds.

ADDRESS and DATA should appear as FIG 2

NOTE: No need to set data other position than 0D00~0E3F and 1000~7FFF

ADDRESS DATA

INIT 0000 00 LCD ON

ANALOG M : DB240_90306 ANALOG S : DB210_81219

0000

FIG. 2

4. ADDRESS is now selected and should "blink". Using the UP/DOWN buton on the remote, step through th

ADDRESS until required ADDRESS to be changed is reached

5. Press LEFT/RIGHT button to select DATA. When DATA is selected, it will "blink".

6. Again, step through the DATA using UP/DOWN button until required DATA value has been selected

7. Pressing LEFT/RIGHT button will take you back to ADDRESS for further selection if necessary.

8. Repeat steps 4 to 6 until all data has been checked.

9. When satisfied correct DATA has been entered, turn POWER off (return to STANDBY MODE) to finish DATA input.

After the data input, set to the initializing of shipping.

10. Turn on the Power.

11. Set the VOLUME to minimum.

12. Press both VOL. DOWN button on the set and Channel button (1) on the remote control for more than 2 seconds

13. After the finishing of the initializing of shipping, the unit will turn off automatically.

The unit will now have the correct DATA for the new MEMORY IC.

C-4 22DV616DG

Page 54

ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENTS

1.Set the VOLUME to minimum

1. ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE

NO. FUNCTION NO. FUNCTION

Read and perform these adjustments when repairing the 01 OSD H POSI 24 V POSI circuits or replacing electrical parts or PCB assemblies 02 OSD V POSI 25 V POSI MAX

03 R DRIVE(N) 26 V POSI MIN

CAUTION

• Use an isolation transformer when performing any 06 G CUTOFF(N) 29 BACKLIGHT MIN

service on this chassis. 07 B DRIVE(N) 30 BRIGHT CENTER

• When removing a PCB or related component, after 08 B CUTOFF(N) 31 BRIGHT MAX

unfastening or changing a wire, be sure to put the wire 09 R DRIVE(C) 32 BRIGHT MIN back in its original position. 10 R CUTOFF(C) 33 TINT CENTER

• When you exchange IC and Transistor with a heat sink, 11 G DRIVE(C) 34 CONTRAST CENTER

apply silicon grease on the contact section of 12 G CUTOFF(C) 35 CONTRAST MAX the heat sink. Before applying new silicon grease, 13 B DRIVE(C) 36 CONTRAST MIN remove all the old silicon grease. (Old grease may cause 14 B CUTOFF(C) 37 CONTRAST 40 damages to the IC and Transistor). 15 R DRIVE(W) 38 COLOR CENTER

Prepare the following measurement tools for electrical adjustments

1. Pattern Generator 20 B CUTOFF(W) 43 FLICKER ADJ

On-Screen Display Adjustment

1. Set the VOLUME to minimum.

2. Press the VOL. DOWN button on the set and the

channel button (9) on the remote control for more than 2 seconds to display adjustment mode on the screen as shown in Fig. 1-1.

04 R CUTOFF(N) 27 BACKLIGHT CENTER 05 G DRIVE(N) 28 BACKLIGHT MAX

16 R CUTOFF(W) 39 COLOR MAX 17 G DRIVE(W) 40 COLOR MIN 18 G CUTOFF(W) 41 TEXT H POSI 19 B DRIVE(W) 42 TEXT V POSI

21 H POSI 22 H POSI MAX 23 H POSI MIN

2. BASIC ADJUSTMENT

2-1: WHITE BALANC

Fig. 1-2

1. Place the set in Aging Test for more than 30 minutes.

2. Receive the gray scale pattern from the Pattern

PAL TUNER Generator.

16:9 3. Press the INPUT button on the remote control

to set to the AV mode.

4. Using the remote control, set the brightness and contrast to normal position.

Activate the adjustment mode display of Fig. 1-1 and press the channel button (03) on the remote control to

01 OSD H POSI 34 select "R DRIVE(N)".

6. Press the UP/DOWN button on the remote control to select the "R CUTOFF(N)", "B DRIVE(N)",

Function "B CUTOFF(N)", "R DRIVE(C)", "R CUTOFF(C)",

Use the UP/DOWN button or Channel button (0-9) on the remote control to select the options shown in "B CUTOFF(N)", "R DRIVE(C)", "R CUTOFF(C)", Fig. 1-2.

4. Press the MENU SETUP button on the remote control "R CUTOFF(W)", "B DRIVE(W)" and "B CUTOFF(W)" to end the adjustments. at each step tone sections equally.

5. To display the adjustment screen for TUNER, AV, 8. Perform the above adjustments 6 and 7 until the white COMPONENT, HDMI, PC and DVD mode, press the achieved. INPUT button on the remote control.

6. Receive the DIGITAL broadcasting.

7. To display the adjustment screen fo DTV mode, select the ATV/DTV button on the remote control.

8. Press the VOL.DOWN button on the set and the channel (9) on the remote control for more than 2 seconds.

Step No.

Fig. 1-1

"B DRIVE(C)", "B CUTOFF(C)", "R DRIVE(W)", "R CUTOFF(W)", "B DRIVE(W)" or "B CUTOFF(W)".

7. Adjust the LEFT/RIGHT button on the remote control to whiten the "R DRIVE(N)", "R CUTOFF(N)", "B DRIVE(N)"

"B DRIVE(C)", "B CUTOFF(C)", "R DRIVE(W)",

D-1 19DV616DG

Page 55

ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENTS

co t ast to o a pos t o

2-2: CONTRAST MAX

1. Place the set in Aging Test for more than 30 minutes.

2. Receive the color bar pattern. (RF Input)

3. Using the remote control, set the brightness and contrast to normal position.

Activate the adjustment mode display of Fig. 1-1 and press the channel button (35) on the remote control to select "CONTRAST MAX".

5. Press the LEFT/RIGHT button on the remote control until the contrast step No. becomes "50".

6. Check if the picture is normal.

7. Receive the color bar pattern. (VIDEO Input)

8. Using the remote control, set the brightness and contrast to normal position.

9. Press the INPUT button on the remote control to set to the AV mode.

10.

Activate the adjustment mode display of Fig. 1-1 and press the channel button (35) on the remote control to select "CONTRAST MAX".

11.

Press the LEFT/RIGHT button on the remote control until the contrast step No. becomes "50".

12.

Check if the picture is normal.

13.

Receive the color bar pattern. (AV RGB Input)

14.

Using the remote control, set the brightness and contrast to normal position.

15.

Press the INPUT button on the remote control to set to the AV(RGB) mode. Then perform the above adjustments 10~12.

16.

Receive the color bar pattern. (S-VIDEO Input)

17.

Using the remote control, set the brightness and contrast to normal position.

18.

Press the INPUT SELECT button on the remote control to set to the AV(Y/C) mode. Then perform the above adjustments 10~12.

19.

Receive the color bar pattern. (COMPONENT Input)

20.

Using the remote control, set the brightness and contrast to normal position.

21.

Press the INPUT button on the remote control to set to the COMPONENT mode.

22.

Activate the adjustment mode display of Fig. 1-1 and press the channel button (35) on the remote control to select "CONTRAST MAX".

23.

Press the LEFT/RIGHT button on the remote control until the contrast step No. becomes "51".

24.

Check if the picture is normal.

25.

Receive the color bar pattern. (HDMI Input)

26.

Using the remote control, set the brightness and contrast to normal position.

27.

Press the INPUT button on the remote control to set to the HDMI mode.

28.

Activate the adjustment mode display of Fig. 1-1 and press the channel button (35) on the remote control to select "CONTRAST MAX".

29.

Press the LEFT/RIGHT button on the remote control until the contrast step No. becomes "51".

30.

Check if the picture is normal.

D-2 19DV616DG

Page 56

ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENTS

1.Set the VOLUME to minimum

1. ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE

NO. FUNCTION NO. FUNCTION

Read and perform these adjustments when repairing the 01 OSD H POSI 24 V POSI circuits or replacing electrical parts or PCB assemblies 02 OSD V POSI 25 V POSI MAX

03 R DRIVE(N) 26 V POSI MIN

CAUTION

• Use an isolation transformer when performing any 06 G CUTOFF(N) 29 BACKLIGHT MIN

service on this chassis. 07 B DRIVE(N) 30 BRIGHT CENTER

• When removing a PCB or related component, after 08 B CUTOFF(N) 31 BRIGHT MAX

unfastening or changing a wire, be sure to put the wire 09 R DRIVE(C) 32 BRIGHT MIN back in its original position. 10 R CUTOFF(C) 33 TINT CENTER

• When you exchange IC and Transistor with a heat sink, 11 G DRIVE(C) 34 CONTRAST CENTER

Prepare the following measurement tools for electrical adjustments

1. Pattern Generator 20 B CUTOFF(W) 43 FLICKER ADJ

On-Screen Display Adjustment

1. Set the VOLUME to minimum.

2. Press the VOL. DOWN button on the set and the

channel button (9) on the remote control for more than 2 seconds to display adjustment mode on the screen as shown in Fig. 1-1.

04 R CUTOFF(N) 27 BACKLIGHT CENTER 05 G DRIVE(N) 28 BACKLIGHT MAX

16 R CUTOFF(W) 39 COLOR MAX 17 G DRIVE(W) 40 COLOR MIN 18 G CUTOFF(W) 41 TEXT H POSI 19 B DRIVE(W) 42 TEXT V POSI

21 H POSI 22 H POSI MAX 23 H POSI MIN

2. BASIC ADJUSTMENT

2-1: WHITE BALANC

Fig. 1-2

1. Place the set in Aging Test for more than 30 minutes.

2. Receive the gray scale pattern from the Pattern

PAL TUNER Generator.

16:9 3. Press the INPUT button on the remote control

to set to the AV mode.

4. Using the remote control, set the brightness and contrast to normal position.

Activate the adjustment mode display of Fig. 1-1 and press the channel button (03) on the remote control to

01 OSD H POSI 34 select "R DRIVE(N)".

6. Press the UP/DOWN button on the remote control to select the "R CUTOFF(N)", "B DRIVE(N)",

Function "B CUTOFF(N)", "R DRIVE(C)", "R CUTOFF(C)",

Use the UP/DOWN button or Channel button (0-9) on the remote control to select the options shown in "B CUTOFF(N)", "R DRIVE(C)", "R CUTOFF(C)", Fig. 1-2.

4. Press the MENU SETUP button on the remote control "R CUTOFF(W)", "B DRIVE(W)" and "B CUTOFF(W)" to end the adjustments. at each step tone sections equally.

5. To display the adjustment screen for TUNER, AV, 8. Perform the above adjustments 6 and 7 until the white COMPONENT, HDMI, PC and DVD mode, press the achieved. INPUT button on the remote control.

6. Receive the DIGITAL broadcasting.

7. To display the adjustment screen fo DTV mode, select the ATV/DTV button on the remote control.

8. Press the VOL.DOWN button on the set and the channel (9) on the remote control for more than 2 seconds.

Step No.

Fig. 1-1

"B DRIVE(C)", "B CUTOFF(C)", "R DRIVE(W)", "R CUTOFF(W)", "B DRIVE(W)" or "B CUTOFF(W)".

7. Adjust the LEFT/RIGHT button on the remote control to whiten the "R DRIVE(N)", "R CUTOFF(N)", "B DRIVE(N)"

"B DRIVE(C)", "B CUTOFF(C)", "R DRIVE(W)",

D-3 22DV616DG

Page 57

ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENTS

co t ast to o a pos t o

2-2: CONTRAST MAX

1. Place the set in Aging Test for more than 30 minutes.

2. Receive the color bar pattern. (RF Input)

3. Using the remote control, set the brightness and contrast to normal position.

Activate the adjustment mode display of Fig. 1-1 and press the channel button (35) on the remote control to select "CONTRAST MAX".

5. Press the LEFT/RIGHT button on the remote control until the contrast step No. becomes "51".

6. Check if the picture is normal.

7. Receive the color bar pattern. (VIDEO Input)

8. Using the remote control, set the brightness and contrast to normal position.

9. Press the INPUT button on the remote control to set to the AV mode.

10.

Activate the adjustment mode display of Fig. 1-1 and press the channel button (35) on the remote control to select "CONTRAST MAX".

11.

Press the LEFT/RIGHT button on the remote control until the contrast step No. becomes "50".

12.

Check if the picture is normal.

13.

Receive the color bar pattern. (AV RGB Input)

14.

Using the remote control, set the brightness and contrast to normal position.

15.

Press the INPUT button on the remote control to set to the AV(RGB) mode. Then perform the above adjustments 10~12.

16.

Receive the color bar pattern. (S-VIDEO Input)

17.

Using the remote control, set the brightness and contrast to normal position.

18.

Press the INPUT SELECT button on the remote control to set to the AV(Y/C) mode. Then perform the above adjustments 10~12.

19.

Receive the color bar pattern. (COMPONENT Input)

20.

Using the remote control, set the brightness and contrast to normal position.

21.

Press the INPUT button on the remote control to set to the COMPONENT mode.

22.

Activate the adjustment mode display of Fig. 1-1 and press the channel button (35) on the remote control to select "CONTRAST MAX".

23.

Press the LEFT/RIGHT button on the remote control until the contrast step No. becomes "51".

24.

Check if the picture is normal.

25.

Receive the color bar pattern. (HDMI Input)

26.

Using the remote control, set the brightness and contrast to normal position.

27.

Press the INPUT button on the remote control to set to the HDMI mode.

28.

Activate the adjustment mode display of Fig. 1-1 and press the channel button (35) on the remote control to select "CONTRAST MAX".

29.

Press the LEFT/RIGHT button on the remote control until the contrast step No. becomes "52".

30.

Check if the picture is normal.

D-4 22DV616DG

Page 58

ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENT

2-3: Confirmation of Fixed Value (Step No.)

Please check if the fixed values of each of the adjustment item is set correctly referring below. (TUNER/AV/COMPONENT/HDMI/PC/DVD/DTV)

FUNCTIONNO.

01 OSD H POSI 34 34 34 34 34 34 34 34 34 34 34 34 34 34 34 34 34 34 34 34 34 34 34 34 34 34 34 34 34 02 OSD V POSI 0 0 0 0 00000000000000000 00000000 03 R DRIVE(N) * ******************** ******** 04 R CUTOFF(N) * ******************** ------** 05 G DRIVE(N) 768 768 768 768 768 768 768 768 768 768 768 768 768 768 768 768 768 768 768 768 768 768 768 768 768 768 768 768 768 06 G CUTOFF(N) 0 0 0 0 00000000000000000 ------00 07 B DRIVE(N) * ******************** ******** 08 B CUTOFF(N) * ******************** ------** 09 R DRIVE(C) * ******************** ------** 10 R CUTOFF(C) * ******************** ------** 11 G DRIVE(C) 768 768 768 768 768 768 768 768 768 768 768 768 768 768 768 768 768 768 768 768 768 ------768768 12 G CUTOFF(C) 0 0 0 0 00000000000000000 ------00 13 B DRIVE(C) * ******************** ------** 14 B CUTOFF(C) * ******************** ------** 15 R DRIVE(W) * ******************** ------** 16 R CUTOFF(W) * ******************** ------** 17 G DRIVE(W) 768 768 768 768 768 768 768 768 768 768 768 768 768 768 768 768 768 768 768 768 768 ------768768 18 G CUTOFF(W) 0 0 0 0 00000000000000000 ------00 19 B DRIVE(W) * ******************** ------** 20 B CUTOFF(W) * ******************** ------**

H POSI 50Hz 4:3/14:9 643 643 643 643 ----624284-------20246-- ------643589 H POSI 50Hz 4:3/14:9 SECAM 660 660 660 643 ----------------- -------H POSI 50Hz 16:9 643 643 643 643 ----624284308256-----2024614491------643589 H POSI 50Hz 16:9 SECAM 660 660 660 643 ----------------- -------H POSI 50Hz CINEMA 643 643 643 643 ----624284-------20246-- ------643589 H POSI 50Hz CINEMA SECAM 664 664 664 643 ----------------- --------

H POSI 50Hz REAL - ----------------130 10 112 43 -------H POSI 60Hz 4:3/14:9 578 578 578 578 564 266 ------138468------ -------H POSI 60Hz 16:9 578 578 578 584 564 266 307 256 ----1384689253---- -------H POSI 60Hz CINEMA 578 578 578 584 564 266 ------138468------ -------H POSI 60Hz REAL - -----------82108608---- -------H POSI PC 4:3 - --------------------104190280- - - - -

H POSI PC 16:9 - --------------------104190280176303344- 22 H POSI MAX (PC) - --------------------129215305201328369- 23 H POSI MIN (PC) - --------------------79165255151278319- -

V POSI 50Hz 4:3 27 27 27 25 ----2754-------1542-- ------2727

V POSI 50Hz 16:9 27 27 27 25 ----27543026-----15423121------2727

V POSI 50Hz REAL - ----------------828617--------

V POSI 50Hz Cinema 60 60 60 59 ----61123-------50112-- ------6161

V POSI 50Hz 14:9 45 45 45 43 ----4591-------3480-- ------4545 24

V POSI 60Hz 4:3 19 19 19 19 20 44 ------103134------ --------

V POSI 60Hz 16:9 19 19 19 19 20 44 11 13 ----1031342812---- --------

V POSI 60Hz REAL - -----------4192255---- --------

V POSI 60Hz Cinema 48 48 48 48 49 102 ------398992------ --------

V POSI 60Hz 14:9 35 35 35 35 36 75 ------266265------ --------

V POSI PC - --------------------272527252523 - 25 V POSI MAX PC - --------------------525052505048- 26 V POSI MIN PC - -------------------- 202000-27 BACKLIGHT CENTER 142 142 142 142 142 142 142 142 142 142 142 142 142 142 142 142 142 142 142 142 142 142 142 142 142 142 142 142 142 28 BACKLIGHT MAX 173 173 173 173 173 173 173 173 173 173 173 173 173 173 173 173 173 173 173 173 173 173 173 173 173 173 173 173 173 29 BACKLIGHT MIN 95 95 95 95 95 95 95 95 95 95 95 95 95 95 95 95 95 95 95 95 95 95 95 95 95 95 95 95 95 30 BRIGHT CENTER 31 BRIGHT MAX 32 BRIGHT MIN 33 TINT CENTER 34 CONTRAST CENTER 35 CONTRAST MAX 36 CONTRAST MIN 37 CONTRAST 40 38 COLOR CENTER 39 COLOR MAX 40 COLOR MIN 41 TEXT H POSI 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 42 TEXT V POSI 7 7 7 7 77777777777777777 77777777

NOTE: For the step no. with + mark, please adjust it according to the 2-4.

For the step no. with * mark, please adjust it according to the situation of the set.

Step No. Step No. Step No.

++++ ++++ ++++ ++++ ++++ ++++ ++++ ++++ ++++ ++++ ++++

AV COMPONENT (NTSC)

CVBS S(Y/C) RGB 480i 480p 720p 1080i 576i 576p 720p 1080i 480i 480p VGA 720p 1080i 576i 576p 720p 1080i 640x480 800x600 1024x768 1280x720 1280x768 1360x768

Step No. Step No.

-10-10-10-10-10-10-10-10-2-2-2-2-2-2-2-2-2888888-10-10 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70

-64 -64 -64 -64 -64 -64 -64 -64 -64 -64 -64 -64 -64 -64 -64 -64 -64 -80 -80 -80 -80 -80 -80 -80 -64

-2-2-2-2-2-2-2-2-1-1-1-1-1-1-1-1-100000000

***************** ******** ***************** ********

18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 22 22 22 22 22 22 18 18

***************** ******** 38 38 38 38 38 38 38 38 34 34 34 34 34 34 34 34 34 45 45 45 45 45 45 36 36 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63

00000000000000000 00000000

COMPONENT (PAL) HDMI (NTSC) HDMI (PAL)

Step No. Step No.

Step No.

DTV

DVDTUNER

D-5 19DV616DG D-6

Page 59

ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENT

2-3: Confirmation of Fixed Value (Step No.)

Please check if the fixed values of each of the adjustment item is set correctly referring below. (TUNER/AV/COMPONENT/HDMI/PC/DVD/DTV)

FUNCTIONNO.

H POSI PC 16:9 - --------------------104190280176303344- 22 H POSI MAX (PC) - --------------------129215305201328369- 23 H POSI MIN (PC) - --------------------79165255151278319- -

V POSI 50Hz 4:3 27 27 27 25 ----2754-------1542-- ------2727

V POSI 50Hz 16:9 27 27 27 25 ----27541818-----154245 ------2727

V POSI 50Hz REAL - ----------------8282844 --------

V POSI 50Hz Cinema 60 60 60 59 ----61123-------50112-- ------6161

V POSI 50Hz 14:9 45 45 45 43 ----4591-------3480-- ------4545 24

V POSI 60Hz 4:3 19 19 19 19 20 44 ------103134------ --------

V POSI 60Hz 16:9 19 19 19 19 20 44 18 5 ----103134175---- --------

V POSI 60Hz REAL - -----------4192255---- --------

V POSI 60Hz Cinema 48 48 48 48 49 102 ------398992------ --------

V POSI 60Hz 14:9 35 35 35 35 36 75 ------266265------ --------

V POSI PC - --------------------272625282523 - 25 V POSI MAX PC - --------------------525150535048- 26 V POSI MIN PC - -------------------- 210300-27 BACKLIGHT CENTER 73 73 73 73 73 73 73 73 73 73 73 73 73 73 73 73 73 73 73 73 73 73 73 73 73 73 73 73 73 28 BACKLIGHT MAX 116 116 116 116 116 116 116 116 116 116 116 116 116 116 116 116 116 116 116 116 116 116 116 116 116 116 116 116 116 29 BACKLIGHT MIN 34 34 34 34 34 34 34 34 34 34 34 34 34 34 34 34 34 34 34 34 34 34 34 34 34 34 34 34 34 30 BRIGHT CENTER 31 BRIGHT MAX 32 BRIGHT MIN 33 TINT CENTER 34 CONTRAST CENTER 35 CONTRAST MAX 36 CONTRAST MIN 37 CONTRAST 40 38 COLOR CENTER 39 COLOR MAX 40 COLOR MIN 41 TEXT H POSI 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 42 TEXT V POSI 7 7 7 7 77777777777777777 77777777

NOTE: For the step no. with + mark, please adjust it according to the 2-4.

For the step no. with * mark, please adjust it according to the situation of the set.

Step No. Step No. Step No.

++++ ++++ ++++ ++++ ++++ ++++ ++++ ++++ ++++ ++++ ++++

AV COMPONENT (NTSC)

CVBS S(Y/C) RGB 480i 480p 720p 1080i 576i 576p 720p 1080i 480i 480p VGA 720p 1080i 576i 576p 720p 1080i 640x480 800x600 1024x768 1280x720 1280x768 1360x768

Step No. Step No.

-13-13-13-13-13-13-13-13-13-13-13-13-13-13-13-13-13888888-17-22 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70

-64 -64 -64 -64 -64 -64 -64 -64 -64 -64 -64 -64 -64 -64 -64 -64 -64 -80 -80 -80 -80 -80 -80 -80 -64

-2-2-2-2-2-2-2-200000000000000000

***************** ******** ***************** ********

18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 22 22 22 22 22 22 18 18

***************** ******** 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 36 36 36 36 36 36 36 36 36 45 45 45 45 45 45 38 36 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63

00000000000000000 00000000

COMPONENT (PAL) HDMI (NTSC) HDMI (PAL)

Step No. Step No.

Step No.

DTV

DVDTUNER

D-7 22DV616DG D-8

Page 60

ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENTS

2-4: Confirmation of Fixed Value (Step No.)

Please check if the fixed values of each of the adjustment item is set correctly referring below. (TUNER/AV)

TUNER

FUNCTIONNO.

PAL50 PAL60 SECAM PAL50 PAL60 SECAM NTSC3.58 NTSC4.43 PAL50 PAL60 SECAM NTSC3.58 NTSC4.43 PAL50 PAL60 SECAM NTSC3.58 NTSC4.43 PAL50 PAL60 SECAM NTSC3.58 NTSC4.43

30 BRIGHT CENTER -7 -7 -7 -10 -10 -10 -10 -10 -10 -10 -10 -10 -10 -10 -10 -10 -10 -10 -10 -10 -10 -10 -10

31 BRIGHT MAX 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70

32 BRIGHT MIN -80 -80 -80 -80 -80 -80 -80 -80 -80 -80 -80 -80 -80 -80 -80 -80 -80 -80 -80 -80 -80 -80 -80

33 TINT CENTER -2 -2 -2 -2 -2 -2 -2 -2 -2 -2 -2 -2 -2 -2 -2 -2 -2 -2 -2 -2 -2 -2 -2

34 CONTRAST CENTER ***********************

35 CONTRAST MAX ***********************

36 CONTRAST MIN 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18

37 CONTRAST 40 ***********************

38 COLOR CENTER 30 30 30 36 36 36 36 36 36 36 36 36 36 36 36 36 36 36 36 36 36 36 36

39 COLOR MAX 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63

40 COLOR MIN 00000000000000000000000

NOTE: For the step no. with * mark, please adjust it according to the situation of the set.

576i

AV1(SCART1)

CVBS

480i

Step No.

AV2(RCA)

CVBS

480i576i576i

Step No.

AV1(SCART1)

RGB

576i 480i

Step No.

AV2(RCA)

S(Y/C)

576i 480i

Step No.Step No.

D-9 19DV616DG D-10

Page 61

ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENTS

2-4: Confirmation of Fixed Value (Step No.)

Please check if the fixed values of each of the adjustment item is set correctly referring below. (TUNER/AV)

TUNER

576i

PAL50 PAL60 SECAM PAL50 PAL60 SECAM NTSC3.58 NTSC4.43 PAL50 PAL60 SECAM NTSC3.58 NTSC4.43 PAL50 PAL60 SECAM NTSC3.58 NT SC4.43 PAL50 PAL60 SECAM NTSC3.58 NTSC4.43

30 BRIGHT CENTER -12 - 12 -12 -10 -10 -10 -10 -10 -10 -10 -10 -10 -10 -10 -10 -10 -10 -10 - 10 -10 -10 -10 -10

31 BRIGHT MAX 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70

32 BRIGHT MIN -80 -80 -80 - 80 -80 -80 -80 -80 -80 -80 -80 -80 -80 -80 -80 -80 -80 -80 -80 -80 - 80 -80 -80

33TINT CENTER -2-2-200000000000000000000

34CONTRAST CENTER***********************

35CONTRAST MAX ***********************

36CONTRAST MIN 1818181818181818181818181818181818181818181818

37CONTRAST 40 ***********************

38 COLOR CENTER 32 32 32 39 39 39 39 39 39 39 39 39 39 38 38 38 38 38 38 38 38 38 38

39COLOR MAX 6363636363636363636363636363636363636363636363

40COLOR MIN 00000000000000000000000

NOTE: For the step no. with * mark, please adjust it according to the situation of the set.

AV1(SCART1)

CVBS

480i

AV2(RCA)

CVBS

480i576i576i

Step No. Step No. Step No.Step No. Step No.

576i 480iFUNCTIONNO.

AV1(SCART1)

RGB

AV2(RCA)

S(Y/C)

576i 480i

D-11 22DV616DG D-12

Page 62

ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENTS

3. ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENT PARTS LOCATION GUIDE (WIRING CONNECTION)

LCD PANEL

CP7001

CP7002

DVD DECK

POWER PCB

CD2302

CD2303

CD2301

CP6401

DVD MT PCB

CP2305

CP2301

DIGITAL PCB

CP3001

CD6501

CP2302

CP8502

CP8501

TUNER PCB

TU5801

CP5803

CD7201

J501

AC IN

CD501

CP8101

J8101

J301

J8102

J8103

OS7601

J8104

CD301

SPEAKER

REMOCON PCB

CP501

CP7601

D-13

CP3801

CP4300

J4301

CP6501

J4206

CP4302

CP7201

CP5802

CP5801

CD4301

CD4302

CP3601

J4208

MAIN PCB

OPERATION PCB

CP2201

19DV616DG

Page 63

ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENTS

3. ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENT PARTS LOCATION GUIDE (WIRING CONNECTION)

LCD PANEL

DVD DECK

CP7001

CP7002

CP7003

CP7004

POWER PCB

J301

J8101

CP8101

CD2302

CP501

CD2303

CD2301

CP6401

CP3801

DVD MT PCB

CP2305

CP2301

DIGITAL PCB

CD6501

CP6501

CP2302

CP3001

CP7202

CP8502

CP8501

TUNER PCB

TU5801

CP5803

CD7201

CP5802

J501

AC IN

CD501

J8102

OS7601

J8103

J8104

CD301

SPEAKER

REMOCON PCB

CP7601

D-14

CP4300

J4301

J4206

CP4302

CP5801

CD4301

CD4302

CP3601

J4208

MAIN PCB

OPERATION PCB

CP2201

22DV616DG

Page 64

(LCD SECTION)

POWER DOES NOT TURN ON

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

Is F501 broken?

Is there voltage at pin 6 of IC501 21V?

Yes

Change MAIN PCB.

Yes

Change F501.

Check IC501 and peripheral circuit.

E-1 19DV616DG/22DV616DGE-1 19DV616DG/22DV616DG

Page 65

THE PICTURE APPEARS, BUT THE AUDIO DOES NOT APPEARS. (AT RF MODE)

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

Is CD301 connected?

Yes

Is there signal at pins 1 and 4 of CD301?

Is there signal at pins 2 and 4 of IC301?

Is there signal at pin 14 of TU5801?

Yes

Connect CD301

Change SP301 and SP302.

Check IC301 and peripheral circuit.

Check IC803 and peripheral circuit.

Change TU5801.

E-2 19DV616DG/22DV616DG

Page 66

THE PICTURE DOES NOT APPEAR

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

Does backlight shine?

Yes

Is CD7201 connected?

Yes

Is there voltage at pins 1, 2 and 3 of CP7201 5V?

No No

Is CP7001 and CP7002 connected?

Yes

Is the voltage at pins 13 and 15 of IC7001 8.3V?

Yes

Connect CD7201

Check Q3810 and peripheral

circuit.

Connected CP7001 and CP7002.

Check IC7001 and peripheral circuit.

Yes

Is there signal at pins 7, 9, 10, 12, 13, 22, 23, 25, 26 and 28 of CP7201?

Change MAIN PCB.

Yes

Change V7201(PANEL).

E-3 19DV616DG

Page 67

THE PICTURE DOES NOT APPEAR

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

Does backlight shine?

Yes

Is CD7201 connected?

Yes

Is there voltage at pins 26, 27, 28, 29 and 30 of CP7202 5V?

No No

Is CP7001, CP7002, CP7003 and CP7004

Yes

Is the voltage at pins 11, 14 of IC7001 24V?

Yes

Connect CD7201

Check Q3810 and peripheral

circuit.

Connect CP7001, CP7002 CP7003 and CP7004.

Check D515, T501 and peripheral circuit.

Yes

Is there signal at pins 5, 6, 8, 9, 11, 12, 14, 15, 17 and 18 of CP7202?

Change MAIN PCB.

Yes

Change V7201(PANEL).

E-4 22DV616DG

Page 68

THE COLOR DOES NOT APPEAR

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

Is setting of color normal?

Yes

Is the color signal received?

Yes

Change MAIN PCB.

Adjust the color.

Receive the color signal.

E-5 19DV616DG/22DV616DGE-5 19DV616DG/22DV616DG

Page 69

(DVD SECTION)

DOES NOT DISPLAY DVD PICTURE

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

Does this display logo picture?

Does this have signal at pins 149 and 151 of IC4001?

Does IC4001 gets P.CON+3.3V and P.CON+1.8V?

Check P.CON+3.3V and P.CON+1.8V line.

Yes

Check the disc.

Check pins 8 and 10 of CP8501 and peripheral circuit.

Change IC4001.

E-6 19DV616DG/22DV616DG

Page 70

DISC DOES NOT EJECT

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

Does OSD appear on the screen?

Yes

Does this eject disc at change DVD DECK?

Yes

Change DVD DECK.

No No

Is remote key set effectively?

Yes

Check pins 138 and 139 of IC4001 and peripheral circuit.

Does this have signal at pins 1 and 3 of CP2302?

Yes

Does this have signal at pins 4 and 5 of CP2302?

Yes

Check pins 12 and 13 of IC101 and peripheral circuit.

Check IC4001 and peripheral circuit.

Change IC2301.

Change IC4001.

E-7 19DV616DG/22DV616DG

Page 71

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

DOES NOT PLAY DVD

Does this display "INCORRECT DISC"?

Does this display reading mark?

Yes

Does CD2301 connect with CP2301 correctly?

Connect CD2301.

Change IC4001.

Yes

Change DVD DECK.

Is the voltage between JG017 and JG018 less than 0.3V?

Yes

Does disc rotate?

Yes

Change IC4001.

Change DVD DECK.

E-8 19DV616DG/22DV616DG

Page 72

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

DOES NOT PLAY CD

Does this display "INCORRECT DISC"?

Does this display reading mark?

Yes

Does CD2301 connect with CP2301 correctly?

Connect CD2301.

Change IC4001.

Yes

Change DVD DECK.

Is the voltage between JG019 and JG018 less than 0.3V?

Yes

Does disc rotate?

Yes

Change IC4001.

Change DVD DECK.

E-9 19DV616DG/22DV616DG

Page 73

NO SOUND DVD/CD ANALOG AUDIO

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

Does this have signal at pins 113, 114, 115 and 116 of IC4001?

Yes

Does this have signal at pins 1 and 7 of IC8501?

Yes

Is CP8501 connected?

Yes

Change MAIN PCB.

Change IC4001.

Check pins 1 and 7 of IC8501 and peripheral circuit.

Connected CP8501.

NO SOUND DVD/CD DIGITAL AUDIO

Does this have signal at pin 1 of CP8501?

Does this have signal at pin 122 of IC4001?

Change IC4001.

Yes

Change MAIN PCB.

Check line circuit IC4001 to CP8501.

E-10 19DV616DG/22DV616DG

Page 74

209

127

123

101

209

PCB130 (DVD MT PCB ASS'Y)

114

128

101G

101H

101A

206

104A

104B

104

PCBDH0 (DIGITAL PCB ASS'Y)

101I

101D

101J

101H

101E

101L

104D

101L

101K

206

101H

101L

101F

110

208

101G

104C

PCB270 (OPERATION PCB ASS'Y)

111

112

107

107B

107A

209

101I

101H

101B

112

108

109

208

209

PCBDA0 (REMOCON PCB ASS'Y)

209

119

209

PCB290 (TUNER PCB ASS'Y)

MECHANICAL EXPLODED VIEW

209

105B

209

PCBF40 (MAIN PCB ASS'Y)

120

209

212

209

105

105A

120

105B

113

209

210

130

120

102A

120

209

131

102B

102E

126

102E

121

210

102E

118

125

201

209

130

207

116

102C

102

102G

102F

209

207

201

207

209

211

102D

102H

120

210

102F

122

120

124

210

102H

102G

120

209

103B

117

210

PCB240 (POWER PCB ASS'Y)

209

129

115

103A

202

103D

209

106B

204

103D

204

106B

103C

103E

106A

209

202

103

203

106

103E

204

103D

202

203

103F

103D

205

204

J1-1

132

101C

130

Note: Hinge Ass'y (129) is not included in Stand Ass'y (103).

19DV616DG

J1-2

Page 75

209

125

101

125

209

PCB130 (DVD MT PCB ASS'Y)

114

101G

101J

101A

101F

206

104A

104B

104

PCBDH0 (DIGITAL PCB ASS'Y)

101K

101D

101L

101H

101J

101H

101G

101E

101N

101H

104E

101G

101I

101M

206

208

101I

101N

110

104D

PCB270 (OPERATION PCB ASS'Y)

104C

111

112

107

107B

107A

209

101H

101K

101J

101B

108

112

101G

109

208

209

PCBDA0 (REMOCON PCB ASS'Y)

209

121

209

PCB290 (TUNER PCB ASS'Y)

MECHANICAL EXPLODED VIEW

209

105B

209

PCBF40 (MAIN PCB ASS'Y)

122

209

212

105

210

105B

105A

209

113

122

209

102G

122

209

116

119

102B

102A

102E

210

102E

120

123

209

201

117

102C

102

102H

102G

209

207

122

209

211

102F

102D

122

209

201

210

102G

124

122

209

210

102F

102H

210

122

103B

118

210

PCB240 (POWER PCB ASS'Y)

209

126

115

103A

202

103D

209

106B

204

103D

204

106B

103C

103E

106A

209

202

103

203

106

103E

204

103D

202

205

103F

203

103D

204

J1-3

127

101C

Note: Hinge Ass'y (126) is not included in Stand Ass'y (103).

22DV616DG

J1-4

Page 76

MECHANICAL EXPLODED VIEW

(PACKING DIAGRAM)

140, 141, 142, 143, 144, 145

CD501

CD3805

TM101

134

133

137

135

139

136

138

136

135

J1-5

19DV616DG

Page 77

MECHANICAL EXPLODED VIEW

(PACKING DIAGRAM)

136, 137, 138, 139, 140, 141

CD501

129

128

TM101

CD3805

133

130

132

130

135

131

134

J1-6

22DV616DG

Page 78

DVD DECK EXPLODED VIEW

600

PCB610 (LOADING MOTOR PCB ASS'Y)

707

CD2302

SW002

SW001

CD2303

PCB630

605

702

703

607

603

601

602

701

M2602

704

604

705

606

CD2301

Do not replace the parts. Because, minute adjustments are needed if this condition is disassembled further more. If the repair is needed, replace the DVD MECHA ASS'Y.

608

623

624

622

614

629

708

624

621

M2603

620

704

623

706

618

611

706

625

613

706

609

619

628

610

709

617

612

709

627

616

615

626

CLASS

GREASE

MARK

NOTE:

Applying positions AA, AB and AC for the grease are displayed for this section.

Check if the correct grease is applied for each position.

J2-1

19DV616DG/22DV616DG

Page 79

MECHANICAL REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST

Location No. TSB P/N Reference No. Description

101 AE017472 7A708A147A FRONT CABI ASS'Y 101A AE017473 701WPBA104 CABINET FRONT 101B AE017051 702WNBA031 SHEET SPEAKER 101C AE017474 708WPDA109 PANEL FRONT 101D AE016801 713WPAA288 GLASS LED 101E AE017053 7230008471 SHEET LED 101F AE017033 7290000202 DOUBLE FACE BOTTOM 101G AE008942 800WQ0A051 FELT SHEET 101H AE009671 800WQ0A073 FELT SHEET 101I AE009395 800WQ00123 FELT SHEET 101J AE017327 723000E232 SHEET GLASS LED 101K AE017475 723000E241 LABEL-L 101L AE017476 723000E242 LABEL-S

102 AE017477 7A702A830A BACK CABI ASS'Y 102A AE017478 702WPAB442 CABINET BACK 102B AE017479 722549A787 SHEET RATING 102C AE017480 723000E214 SHEET JACK 102D AE016806 761WSAA152 ANGLE HINGE 102E AE016807 761WSA0709 ANGLE BACK 102F AE017009 800WQ0A163 FELT SHEET 102G AE016995 800WQ00119 FELT SHEET 102H AE009955 800WQ00122 FELT SHEET

103 AE017481 7A704A188A STAND ASS'Y 103A AE009647 704WPAA068 STAND 103B AE017089 761WPAA227 COVER HINGE 103C AE009587 761WSBA014 ANGLE STAND 103D AE009624 800SRA0002 CUSHION LEG VEB1349-A 103E AE008947 899NAGCL14 CABLE CLAMP 103F AE007710 89900FB118 BAND

104 AE017482 7A711A156A PANEL SIDE ASS'Y 104A AE017483 711WPDA876 PANEL SIDE 104B AE009581 711WPEA001 SLOT DVD 104C AE017058 735WPAB173 BUTTON FRAME 104D AE016811 800WQ00175 FELT SHEET (DVD)

105 AE017018 7A761A012A HOLDER SPEAKER-L ASS'Y 105A AE016821 761WPAA219 HOLDER SPEAKER-L 105B AE009679 800WQ0A119 FELT SHEET

106 AE017019 7A761A013A HOLDER SPEAKER-R ASS'Y 106A AE016822 761WPAA220 HOLDER SPEAKER-R 106B AE009679 800WQ0A119 FELT SHEET

107 AE017446 7G752A012A SHIELD CI CARD BOTTOM ASS'Y 107A AE009784 744WUA0038 SPRING EARTH-3 107B AE017437 752WSA0733 SHIELD CI CARD BOTTOM

108 AE017436 752WSA0732 SHIELD CI CARD TOP 109 AE009886 800WQ0A069 FELT SHEET

110 AE016102 800WQ0A113 FELT SHEET 111 AE009679 800WQ0A119 FELT SHEET 112 AE016995 800WQ00119 FELT SHEET 113 AE017359 724000A016 SHEET SHIELD-IC 114 AE017275 761WSA0721 SHIELD LVDS 115 AE017059 702WPAB424 COVER INVERTER 116 AE009650 706WPA0034 COVER CONNECTOR 117 AE017062 725000A108 SHEET WARNING 118 AE008287 726000A139 SHEET CAUTION 119 AE017361 744WSA0009 SPRING EARTH TUNER

120 AE009784 744WUA0038 SPRING EARTH-3 121 AE017364 752WSAA166 PLATE PCB 122 AE017362 752WSA0731 SHIELD JACK 123 AE015632 753WUAA006 SPRING EARTH H/AMP 124 AE017064 761WPAA228 COVER AC 125 AE016999 800WFAA045 CUSHION 126 AE017447 800WFAA049 CUSHION 127 AE008967 899RFC21V0 HOLDER CORD 128 AE009627 899RFPC25V HOLDER CORD 129 AE016816 706KSAA003 HINGE ASS'Y

130 AE017003 800WQ0A157 FELT SHEET 131 75008108 800WQ00120 FELT SHEET

132 AE017435 723549A104 POP LABEL 133 AE017278 791WHAA264 LAMIFILM BAG 134 AE017438 792PHAA032 PACKAGE TOP 135 AE017439 792PHAA033 PACKAGE BOTTOM 136 AE017440 792PHAA040 PAD FOAM 137 AE017484 793WCDE051 GIFT BOX 138 AE009603 794WHA0003 HANDLE 139 AE009604 794WHA0004 HANDLE STOPPER

140 AE016583 JB5PD000 POLYBAG,INSTRUCTION(RED CAUTION) 141 AE017335 J52R0107A QUICK SET-UP SHEET(E) 142 AE017336 J52R0110A SIMPLE INSTRUCTION BOOK(9 LANG.)

K1-1 19DV616DG

Page 80

MECHANICAL REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST

Location No. TSB P/N Reference No. Description

143 AE017337 J52R0131A INSTRUCTION BOOK(E) 144 AE017338 J52R0132A INSTRUCTION BOOK(G) 145 AE017339 J52R0133A INSTRUCTION BOOK(F)

201 AE005473 8109D30A0U SCREW TAP TITE(B) WH8 3*10 CH 202 AE005140 810A14080U SCREW WASHER(A) M4*8 CH 203 AE005675 810923060U SCREW TAP TITE(B) BIND 3*6 CH 204 AE009612 8110K3080U SCREW TAP TITE(P) LAMI HEAD 3*8 CH 205 AE007747 814623080U SCREW TAP TITE(B) BIND 3*5.7+4*2.3 CH 206 AE003526 810923080U SCREW TAP TITE(B) BIND 3*8 CH 207 AE003524 8109I30A0U SCREW TAP TITE(B) WH7 3*10 CH 208 AE017448 8102220A2U SCREW BIND M2*12 CH 209 AE004849 8109230A0U SCREW TAP TITE(B) BIND 3*10 CH

210 AE009655 8109230A4U SCREW TAP TITE(B) BIND 3*14 CH 211 AE004847 8117540A6U SCREW TAPPING(B0) TRUSS 4*16 CH 212 AE004851 810223080U SCREW BIND M3*8 CH

K1-2 19DV616DG

Page 81

MECHANICAL REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST

Location No.TSB P/N Reference No. Description

101 AE017486 7A708A148A FRONT CABI ASS'Y 101A AE017487 701WPBA105 CABINET FRONT 101B AE017070 702WNBA030 SHEET SPEAKER 101C AE017488 708WPDA110 PANEL FRONT 101D AE016801 713WPAA288 GLASS LED 101E AE017053 7230008471 SHEET LED 101F AE017072 7290000203 DOUBLE FACE BOTTOM 101G AE009671 800WQ0A073 FELT SHEET 101H AE017377 800WQ0A156 FELT SHEET 101I AE017003 800WQ0A157 FELT SHEET 101J AE016995 800WQ00119 FELT SHEET 101K AE009395 800WQ00123 FELT SHEET 101L AE017327 723000E232 SHEET GLASS LED 101M AE017475 723000E241 LABEL-L 101N AE017476 723000E242 LABEL-S

102 AE017489 7A702A831A BACK CABI ASS'Y 102A AE017490 702WPAB445 CABINET BACK 102B AE017491 722549A788 SHEET RATING 102C AE017480 723000E214 SHEET JACK 102D AE016806 761WSAA152 ANGLE HINGE 102E AE016807 761WSA0709 ANGLE BACK 102F AE003110 800WQ0A052 FELT SHEET 102G AE017013 800WQ0A207 FELT SHEET 102H AE016995 800WQ00119 FELT SHEET

104 AE017492 7A711A157A PANEL SIDE ASS'Y 104A AE017485 711WPDA877 PANEL SIDE 104B AE009581 711WPEA001 SLOT DVD 104C AE017058 735WPAB173 BUTTON FRAME 104D AE007482 800WQ0A068 FELT SHEET 104E AE016811 800WQ00175 FELT SHEET (DVD)

105 AE017018 7A761A012A HOLDER SPEAKER-L ASS'Y 105A AE016821 761WPAA219 HOLDER SPEAKER-L 105B AE009679 800WQ0A119 FELT SHEET

106 AE017019 7A761A013A HOLDER SPEAKER-R ASS'Y 106A AE016822 761WPAA220 HOLDER SPEAKER-R 106B AE009679 800WQ0A119 FELT SHEET

107 AE017446 7G752A012A SHIELD CI CARD BOTTOM ASS'Y 107A AE009784 744WUA0038 SPRING EARTH-3 107B AE017437 752WSA0733 SHIELD CI CARD BOTTOM

108 AE017436 752WSA0732 SHIELD CI CARD TOP 109 AE009886 800WQ0A069 FELT SHEET

110 AE016102 800WQ0A113 FELT SHEET 111 AE009679 800WQ0A119 FELT SHEET 112 AE016995 800WQ00119 FELT SHEET 113 AE017359 724000A016 SHEET SHIELD-IC 114 AE017275 761WSA0721 SHIELD LVDS 115 AE017059 702WPAB424 COVER INVERTER 116 AE017076 702WPAB414 COVER LVDS 117 AE009650 706WPA0034 COVER CONNECTOR 118 AE017062 725000A108 SHEET WARNING 119 AE017493 725000A110 WARNING LABEL

120 AE008287 726000A139 SHEET CAUTION 121 AE017361 744WSA0009 SPRING EARTH TUNER 122 AE009784 744WUA0038 SPRING EARTH-3 123 AE017364 752WSAA166 PLATE PCB 124 AE017362 752WSA0731 SHIELD JACK 125 AE015632 753WUAA006 SPRING EARTH H/AMP 126 AE016816 706KSAA003 HINGE ASS'Y 127 AE017467 723549A107 POP LABEL 128 AE017278 791WHAA264 LAMIFILM BAG 129 AE017468 792PHAA034 PACKAGE TOP

130 AE017469 792PHAA035 PACKAGE BOTTOM 131 AE017440 792PHAA040 PAD FOAM 132 AE017470 792PHAA041 PAD FOAM 133 AE017494 793WCDE057 GIFT BOX 134 AE009603 794WHA0003 HANDLE 135 AE009604 794WHA0004 HANDLE STOPPER 136 AE016583 JB5PD000 POLYBAG,INSTRUCTION(RED CAUTION) 137 AE017335 J52R0107A QUICK SET-UP SHEET(E) 138 AE017336 J52R0110A SIMPLE INSTRUCTION BOOK(9 LANG.) 139 AE017337 J52R0131A INSTRUCTION BOOK(E)

140 AE017338 J52R0132A INSTRUCTION BOOK(G) 141 AE017339 J52R0133A INSTRUCTION BOOK(F)

K1-3

22DV616DG

Page 82

MECHANICAL REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST

Location No.TSB P/N Reference No. Description

210 AE009655 8109230A4U SCREW TAP TITE(B) BIND 3*14 CH 211 AE004847 8117540A6U SCREW TAPPING(B0) TRUSS 4*16 CH 212 AE004851 810223080U SCREW BIND M3*8 CH

K1-4

22DV616DG

Page 83

DVD DECK REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST

611

AE017299

92P000039A

PLATE RETAINER

623

AE017312

92P100180A

LUMIRROR WASHER

705

AE017320

92P700016A

SEMS TAP TITE(P) PAN W8 2 8 CH

SW001

AE017292

0500101041

PUSH SWITCH ESE31R91T

Location No. TSB P/N Reference No. Description

! 600 AE017324 A52C01T650 DVD MECHA ASS'Y A52C01T650

601 AE005815 92AAA0017A FEED RACK ASS'Y 602 AE003551 92P100088A GEAR,MOTOR 603 AE005816 92P100116A GEAR,FEED 604 AE005805 92P100117A GEAR,MIDDLE 605 AE017308 92P100171A HOLDER TRAVERSE 606 AE008501 92P200018A INSULATOR, R 607 AE017314 92P200021A INSULATOR F

608 AE017325 A52C01T700 LOADER SUB ASS'Y

609 AE017297 92P000036A COVER CLAMPER

610 AE017298 92P000037A PLATE CLAMPER

612 AE017300 92P100158A FRAME MAIN 613 AE017301 92P100159A RETAINER SHUTTER 614 AE017302 92P100160A CHASSIS MAIN 615 AE017303 92P100161A LEVER DISC 616 AE017304 92P100162A LEVER GUIDE 617 AE017305 92P100163A GUIDE DISC 618 AE017306 92P100164A GEAR ROLLER 619 AE017307 92P100165A CLAMPER

620 AE017309 92P100172A GEAR WORM 621 AE017310 92P100175A RACK LEVER 622 AE017311 92P100176A PLATE TRVS UD

624 AE017313 92P200020A ROLLER CONE 625 AE017315 92P300033A SPRING SHUTTER 626 AE017316 92P300034A SPRING LEVER DISC 627 AE017317 92P300035A SPRING LEVER GUIDE 628 AE017318 92P400011A MAGNET CLAMPER 629 AE017319 92P500011A SHAFT ROLLER

701 AE005817 92P700007A SCREW,GEAR FEED 702 AE003557 811022080U SCREW,TAP TITE(P) BIND 2*8 CH 703 AE005006 813381750U SCREW,T-TITE(B)CAMERA PAN M1.7*5.0 P3 CH 704 AE003554 814011723U SCREW,PAN M1.7*2.3 P3 CH

706 AE017296 810922030U SCREW TAP TITE(B) BIND 2*3 CH 707 AE006823 810922060U SCREW,TAP TITE(B) BIND 2*6 CH 708 AE017321 92P700017A SCREW TAP TITE(P)BIND WH7 M2.6*8 CH 709 AE017322 92P700018A SCREW TAP TITE(P) BIND 2.6*8 CH

CD2301 AE009434 12C14O1602 CORD JUMPER FFC05241600408T1-A04 CD2302 AE003559 122H052601 CORD JUMPER 2H052601 CD2303 AE017293 122H042101 CORD JUMPER 2H042101 M2602 AE009616 1515T98006 MOTOR WRF-300CA-10460A M2603 AE017295 1596L98004 MOTOR,LOADING WRF-300CA-10460F PCB610 AE017323 A52C01T610 LOADING MOTOR PCB ASS'Y FEH002A PCB630 AE017294 13DED020AW PCB ASS'Y DED020A

SW002 AE017292 0500101041 PUSH SWITCH ESE31R91T

K2-1 19DV616DG

Page 84

DVD DECK REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST

611

AE017299

92P000039A

PLATE RETAINER

705

AE017320

92P700016A

SEMS TAP TITE(P) PAN W8 2 8 CH

SW001

AE017292

0500101041

PUSH SWITCH ESE31R91T

Location No. TSB P/N Reference No. Description

! 600 AE017324 A52C01T650 DVD MECHA ASS'Y A52C01T650

608 AE017325 A52C01T700 LOADER SUB ASS'Y

609 AE017297 92P000036A COVER CLAMPER

610 AE017298 92P000037A PLATE CLAMPER

620 AE017309 92P100172A GEAR WORM 621 AE017310 92P100175A RACK LEVER 622 AE017311 92P100176A PLATE TRVS UD 623 AE017312 92P100180A LUMIRROR W ASHER 624 AE017313 92P200020A ROLLER CONE 625 AE017315 92P300033A SPRING SHUTTER 626 AE017316 92P300034A SPRING LEVER DISC 627 AE017317 92P300035A SPRING LEVER GUIDE 628 AE017318 92P400011A MAGNET CLAMPER 629 AE017319 92P500011A SHAFT ROLLER

CD2301 AE009434 12C14O1602 CORD JUMPER FFC05241600408T1-A04 CD2302 AE003559 122H052601 CORD JUMPER 2H052601 CD2303 AE017293 122H042101 CORD JUMPER 2H042101 M2602 AE009616 1515T98006 MOTOR W RF-300CA-10460A M2603 AE017295 1596L98004 MOTOR,LOADING WRF-300CA-10460F PCB610 AE017323 A52C01T610 LOADING MOTOR PCB ASS'Y FEH002A PCB630 AE017294 13DED020AW PCB ASS'Y DED020A

SW002 AE017292 0500101041 PUSH SWITCH ESE31R91T

K2-2 22DV616DG

Page 85

ELECTRICAL REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST

D510

AE016750

D4JXRM11C0

DIODE SILICON

ZRM11C

Location No.TSB P/N Reference No. Description

! R501 AE012411 R002T2223J RC 22K OHM 1/2W ! R503 75006901 RC31X1126J RC 12M OHM 1W ! R505 AE009485 R63884330J R,FUSE 33 OHM 1/4W ! R506 AE002150 R803R9333J RC 33K OHM 1/16W ! R509 AE009486 RC31X1125J RC 1.2M OHM 1W ! R510 AE005735 R63881R22J R,FUSE 0.22 OHM 1W R512 AE017411 R3K781823J R,METAL OXIDE 82K OHM 1W ! R518 AE012427 R002T4101J RC 100 OHM 1/4W ! R544 AE009808 R861R42R0F RC 2 OHM 1/4W ! R545 AE009808 R861R42R0F RC 2 OHM 1/4W ! R546 AE009808 R861R42R0F RC 2 OHM 1/4W ! R547 AE009808 R861R42R0F RC 2 OHM 1/4W

! C501 AE001726 CS0PB0414K CC 0.01 UF 50V B ! C502 AE017408 E83FHH101D CE 100 UF 400V ! C503 AE001729 CS0PCH412J CC 100 PF 50V CH ! C504 AE009918 E83YF1222D CE 2200 UF 10V ! C505 AE011289 CS0PCH4S1J CC 56 PF 50V CH ! C506 AE016469 P4K12D224K CMPP 0.22 UF 310V ! C507 AE000308 CD39B0MQ2K CC 470 PF 250V ! C508 AE016468 P4K12D104K CMPP 0.1 UF 310V ! C513 AE011367 C0PLRR7Q2K CC 470 PF 2KV R ! C514 AE011227 CD39E0M13M CC 0.001 UF 250V C518 AE009492 P332E4223J CPP 0.022 UF 400V ! C520 75007051 E8E2U54R7D CE 4.7 UF 50V ! C522 AE009920 E83YF2102D CE 1000 UF 16V ! C525 AE016747 E83YF3102D CE 1000 UF 25V ! C534 AE011227 CD39E0M13M CC 0.001 UF 250V ! C3840 75007767 CS7RC0N17M CC 10 UF 10V C C7030 AE016748 C234SLBB1J CC 12 PF 6KV SL C7033 AE016748 C234SLBB1J CC 12 PF 6KV SL

D501 AE009494 DE7RB3302B DIODE ZENER UDZSNP33B TE-17 ! D504 AE017221 D7KE103020 DIODE VARISTA S10K300E2S5M4 ! D505 AE011447 D2WXN40050 DIODE SILICON 1N4005-EIC ! D507 AE016750 D4JXRM11C0 DIODE SILICON ZRM11C ! D508 AE016750 D4JXRM11C0 DIODE SILICON ZRM11C D509 AE009494 DE7RB3302B DIODE ZENER UDZSNP33B TE-17

! D511 AE016751 D4AT01H6E0 DIODE RECTIFIER 1H6-E D512 AE002133 D2BXARS010 DIODE SILICON SARS01-V1 ! D514 AE011449 D2WXRU2AM0 DIODE SILICON RU2AM-EIC ! D515 AE016752 D28F31DQ10 DIODE SCHOTTKY 31DQ10-FC ! D516 AE008319 D4AT01H3E0 DIODE RECTIFIER 1H3-E D517 AE011502 D97U01601B DIODE ZENER MTZJ16B T-77 ! D518 AE016750 D4JXRM11C0 DIODE SILICON ZRM11C ! D523 AE017407 D28A10A061 DIODE SCHOTTKY BARRIER FCQS10A065 D525 75006232 D4CRSK34A0 DIODE SCHOTTKY SK34A D526 AE016755 DE7RB2202B DIODE ZENER UDZSNP22B TE-17 D527 AE011514 D97U03301B DIODE,ZENER MTZJ33B T-77 D528 AE011514 D97U03301B DIODE,ZENER MTZJ33B T-77 D804 AE009006 DGERMA1110 DIODE SILICON MA111-(TX) D805 AE009498 DGJRT54WS0 DIODE SCHOTTKY BARRIER BAT54WS D1001 AE009006 DGERMA1110 DIODE SILICON MA111-(TX) D1002 AE009498 DGJRT54WS0 DIODE SCHOTTKY BARRIER BAT54WS D2303 AE009006 DGERMA1110 DIODE SILICON MA111-(TX) D2304 AE009006 DGERMA1110 DIODE SILICON MA111-(TX) D2402 AE009006 DGERMA1110 DIODE SILICON MA111-(TX) D2403 AE009006 DGERMA1110 DIODE SILICON MA111-(TX) D3201 75006232 D4CRSK34A0 DIODE SCHOTTKY SK34A D3600 AE009498 DGJRT54WS0 DIODE SCHOTTKY BARRIER BAT54WS D3601 AE016757 D61R0V8001 DIODE VARISTA EZJZ0V80010 D3603 AE016757 D61R0V8001 DIODE VARISTA EZJZ0V80010 D3605 AE009497 DDLRS160T0 DIODE SCHOTTKY BARRIER SS160-T D3804 AE008906 D28R11FS20 DIODE EC11FS2-TE12L ! D3805 75006232 D4CRSK34A0 DIODE SCHOTTKY SK34A ! D3806 AE004643 D28R1QS040 DIODE EC31QS04-TE12L D3807 AE009716 DE7RB1302B DIODE ZENER UDZSNP13B TE-17 D3809 AE009006 DGERMA1110 DIODE SILICON MA111-(TX) D4008 AE009006 DGERMA1110 DIODE SILICON MA111-(TX) D4211 AE008091 DE7RB4R72B DIODE ZENER UDZSNP4.7B TE-17 D6402 AE009006 DGERMA1110 DIODE SILICON MA111-(TX) D6403 75006232 D4CRSK34A0 DIODE SCHOTTKY SK34A D7003 AE016758 DE7RB9R12B DIODE ZENER UDZSNP9.1B TE-17 D7004 AE009006 DGERMA1110 DIODE SILICON MA111-(TX) D7012 AE011421 D1VT001330 DIODE,SILICON 1SS133T-77 D7013 AE009006 DGERMA1110 DIODE SILICON MA111-(TX) D7014 AE009006 DGERMA1110 DIODE SILICON MA111-(TX) D7017 AE009006 DGERMA1110 DIODE SILICON MA111-(TX) D7018 AE009006 DGERMA1110 DIODE SILICON MA111-(TX) D7024 AE009006 DGERMA1110 DIODE SILICON MA111-(TX) D7601 AE000288 0021E9Q010 LED LTL-1BEFJ-002A D8510 AE009006 DGERMA1110 DIODE SILICON MA111-(TX)

RESISTORS

CAPACITORS

DIODES

ICS

K3-1 19DV616DG

Page 86

ELECTRICAL REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST

IC8502

AE009805

I1YF9117A0

VO ADJ IO 1A TAPING

LD1117AL ADJ AA3 A R

Location No.TSB P/N Reference No. Description

IC802 AE011998 I9UF032290 RESET IC 2.9V TYPE PST3229NR ! IC2301 AE008194 I03FV65650 5CH MOTOR DRIVER IC LA6565VR-TLM-E IC2401 AE011746 I5PK05ALC0 MPEG DECORDER STI5105ALC IC2402 AE011999 I9UF032310 RESET IC 3.1V TYPE PST3231NR IC2403 AE017231 ICLJ022FC5 DDR-400 256M CL=3 HY5DU561622FTP-D43-C IC2409 AE017232 ICRJ064CN0 EEPROM 64K SOIC AT24C64CN-SH-T IC3001 75007780 I55F045FT0 8BIT BUS TRANSCEIVER TC74LCX245FT(EL) IC3002 75007782 I55J0X2440 20PIN LOW VOLTAGE BUS BUFFER TC74LCX244FT(EL,K) IC3003 75007782 I55J0X2440 20PIN LOW VOLTAGE BUS BUFFER TC74LCX244FT(EL,K) IC3004 75007782 I55J0X2440 20PIN LOW VOLTAGE BUS BUFFER TC74LCX244FT(EL,K) IC3005 75007782 I55J0X2440 20PIN LOW VOLTAGE BUS BUFFER TC74LCX244FT(EL,K) IC3006 75007781 I55J0CX020 2 INPUT NOR GATE TC74LCX02FT(EL) IC3007 75007779 I55F0125F0 BUS BUFFER TC7SH125FU(TE85L,F ! IC3202 AE016764 I07F993230 DC-DC CONVERTER 3.0A BD9323EFJ ! IC3204 AE017227 I1ZF9181D0 REGULATOR 1.8V RP131H181D-T1-F ! IC3205 AE017410 I1ZF9501D0 REGULATOR 5V RP131H501D-T1-F ! IC3206 AE008431 I07F078200 VARIABLE REG LOW INPUT IO=1A BD7820FP-E2 IC3605 75007789 IG1F090250 144PIN TQFP HDMI RECEIVER SII9025CTU IC3606 AE017237 S52R02AE02 MEMORY DATA EEPROM 2K 12C S-24CS02AFJ-TB-GE ! IC3801 AE007825 I07F0C0WF0 1A REGULATOR BA00BC0WFP-E2 ! IC3806 AE017410 I1ZF9501D0 REGULATOR 5V RP131H501D-T1-F IC4001 AE009720 ICQK06966A VADDIS9 MPEG/MICON/DSP/RF-AMP ZR36966ELCG-D-G IC4005 AE016766 IG2J081656 SDRAM 166MHZ 4*16MBIT 54PIN EM638165TS-6G(0.11UM-N) IC4202 AE001069 I0UF015020 A/V SW 2INPUT 1OUTPUT 6DBAMP MM1502XNRE IC4205 AE004651 I0QF025840 A/V SW 2INPUT 1OUTPUT NJM2584AM(TE1) IC5801 AE017230 I55L0053A0 3X2CH MULTIPLEXER TSSOP TC74VHC4053AFT(E,K IC6101 75007784 I5PK003620 DVB-T SINGLE CHIP RECEIVER STV0362 ! IC6401 AE017229 I1ZF9331D0 REGULATOR 3.3V RP131H331D-T1-F ! IC6405 AE017228 I1ZF9251D0 REGULATOR 2.5V RP131H251D-T1-F IC6406 AE002504 I0QF0580V0 AUDIO OPERATION AMP NJM4580V(TE1) ! IC6407 AE017228 I1ZF9251D0 REGULATOR 2.5V RP131H251D-T1-F ! IC6408 AE017226 I1ZF9121D0 REGULATOR 1.2V RP131H121D-T1-F ! IC6409 AE017225 I1ZF9101D0 REGULATOR 1V RP131H101D-T1-F IC6500 AE009928 I55F0A53FU A/V SW 2IN 1OUT TC7PA53FU(T5L,F,T) IC6501 AE011796 I0UF015010 A/V SW 2INPUT 1OUTPUT MM1501XNRE IC6502 AE011796 I0UF015010 A/V SW 2INPUT 1OUTPUT MM1501XNRE IC7001 AE016769 I07F098930 INVERTER CONTROL IC BD9893F-E2 IC8501 AE009365 I0QF045650 DUAL OPEAMP NJM4565M(TE1)

Q101 AE016772 T27T035410 FET 2SK3541_T2L Q102 AE016772 T27T035410 FET 2SK3541_T2L ! Q501 AE009722 T41GK35320 FET 2SK3532-01MR Q503 AE013033 TPAAC05002 COMPOUND TRANSISTOR KRA103SRTK Q504 AE013011 TNAAC05002 COMPOUND TRANSISTOR KRC103SRTK Q505 AE012926 TAAA1504SY TRANSISTOR SILICON KTA1504S_Y_RTK Q1001 AE013032 TPAAB05001 COMPOUND TRANSISTOR KRA102SRTK Q1002 AE012951 TCAA3875SY TRANSISTOR SILICON KTC3875S_Y_RTK Q1003 AE012951 TCAA3875SY TRANSISTOR SILICON KTC3875S_Y_RTK Q1004 AE012926 TAAA1504SY TRANSISTOR SILICON KTA1504S_Y_RTK Q1005 AE013031 TPAAA05001 COMPOUND TRANSISTOR KRA101SRTK Q1006 AE012951 TCAA3875SY TRANSISTOR SILICON KTC3875S_Y_RTK Q1008 AE013010 TNAAB05003 COMPOUND TRANSISTOR KRC102SRTK Q2301 AE012926 TAAA1504SY TRANSISTOR SILICON KTA1504S_Y_RTK Q2302 AE008330 TAAA1505SY TRANSISTOR SILICON KTA1505S-Y-RTK/P Q3002 AE012951 TCAA3875SY TRANSISTOR SILICON KTC3875S_Y_RTK Q3003 AE012951 TCAA3875SY TRANSISTOR SILICON KTC3875S_Y_RTK Q3004 AE009621 TL4A01664Y TRANSISTOR SILICON KTA1664-Y(GP) ! Q3200 AE009621 TL4A01664Y TRANSISTOR SILICON KTA1664-Y(GP) Q3201 AE012951 TCAA3875SY TRANSISTOR SILICON KTC3875S_Y_RTK Q3205 AE012951 TCAA3875SY TRANSISTOR SILICON KTC3875S_Y_RTK ! Q3206 AE009621 TL4A01664Y TRANSISTOR SILICON KTA1664-Y(GP) ! Q3207 AE009621 TL4A01664Y TRANSISTOR SILICON KTA1664-Y(GP) Q3208 AE012951 TCAA3875SY TRANSISTOR SILICON KTC3875S_Y_RTK Q3601 AE016772 T27T035410 FET 2SK3541_T2L Q3602 AE012951 TCAA3875SY TRANSISTOR SILICON KTC3875S_Y_RTK Q3603 AE016772 T27T035410 FET 2SK3541_T2L Q3604 AE016772 T27T035410 FET 2SK3541_T2L Q3605 AE016772 T27T035410 FET 2SK3541_T2L Q3618 AE016772 T27T035410 FET 2SK3541_T2L ! Q3801 AE009514 TJ7T35P020 FET RTQ035P02-TR Q3802 AE013010 TNAAB05003 COMPOUND TRANSISTOR KRC102SRTK Q3803 AE013010 TNAAB05003 COMPOUND TRANSISTOR KRC102SRTK Q3804 AE012951 TCAA3875SY TRANSISTOR SILICON KTC3875S_Y_RTK ! Q3805 AE009621 TL4A01664Y TRANSISTOR SILICON KTA1664-Y(GP) Q3808 AE013010 TNAAB05003 COMPOUND TRANSISTOR KRC102SRTK ! Q3809 AE009514 TJ7T35P020 FET RTQ035P02-TR ! Q3810 AE016771 TK9A3443B0 FET SI3443BDV-T1-E3 Q3811 AE013033 TPAAC05002 COMPOUND TRANSISTOR KRA103SRTK Q3812 AE013011 TNAAC05002 COMPOUND TRANSISTOR KRC103SRTK Q4200 AE012951 TCAA3875SY TRANSISTOR SILICON KTC3875S_Y_RTK Q4201 AE012926 TAAA1504SY TRANSISTOR SILICON KTA1504S_Y_RTK Q4205 AE012951 TCAA3875SY TRANSISTOR SILICON KTC3875S_Y_RTK Q4210 AE012951 TCAA3875SY TRANSISTOR SILICON KTC3875S_Y_RTK Q4217 AE013033 TPAAC05002 COMPOUND TRANSISTOR KRA103SRTK Q4218 AE013010 TNAAB05003 COMPOUND TRANSISTOR KRC102SRTK Q4303 AE012951 TCAA3875SY TRANSISTOR SILICON KTC3875S_Y_RTK Q4304 AE012951 TCAA3875SY TRANSISTOR SILICON KTC3875S_Y_RTK Q4305 AE013032 TPAAB05001 COMPOUND TRANSISTOR KRA102SRTK

ICS

TRANSISTORS

---

K3-2 19DV616DG

Page 87

ELECTRICAL REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST

Location No.TSB P/N Reference No. Description

Q4306 AE012951 TCAA3875SY TRANSISTOR SILICON KTC3875S_Y_RTK Q4307 AE012951 TCAA3875SY TRANSISTOR SILICON KTC3875S_Y_RTK Q4308 AE013032 TPAAB05001 COMPOUND TRANSISTOR KRA102SRTK Q7001 AE012951 TCAA3875SY TRANSISTOR SILICON KTC3875S_Y_RTK Q7002 AE012952 TCATC31980 TRANSISTOR,SILICON KTC3198-AT(Y,GR) ! Q7004 AE004664 TS3M000040 COMPOUND TRANSISTOR FW256-TL-E

! L501 AE009366 029X000121 COIL,LINE FILTER SS24H-K08240-CH L503 AE013323 02167E220K COIL 22 UH L504 AE013322 02167E100K COIL 10 UH L505 AE017419 02120K100M COIL 10 UH L3201 AE016774 021UMK100P COIL 10 UH L3202 AE016774 021UMK100P COIL 10 UH L3601 AE009519 02D1000119 COIL CHOKE EXC28CG900U L3602 AE009519 02D1000119 COIL CHOKE EXC28CG900U L8502 AE016775 021ES11R0K COIL 1 UH ! T501 AE017381 0481280268 TRANSFORMER,SW ITCHING 81280268 ! T7001 AE016777 048137001R TRANSFORMER,SWITCHING 8137001R

! J301 AE009522 060R131024 HEADPHONE JACK PJ-364H ! J501 AE009725 064Q1A0011 JACK,AC CCT2302-0701C J4206 AE009726 063D100067 SOCKET,21PIN MRC-021H-02PC(O87) J4208 AE009522 060R131024 HEADPHONE JACK PJ-364H J4301 AE009524 060R401140 RCA JACK RCA-101HT(OR) J8101 AE009526 062R750007 PLUG DIN-417HA-01 J8102 AE009527 060R411058 RCA JACK RCA-341H(NI)-09 J8103 AE009528 060R431039 RCA JACK RCA-228H(3)NI-02 J8104 AE009529 060R431040 RCA JACK RCA-341H(2)NI-06

SW2201 AE013551 0504101T34 SW ITCH,TACT EVQ21505R SW2202 AE013551 0504101T34 SW ITCH,TACT EVQ21505R SW2203 AE013551 0504101T34 SW ITCH,TACT EVQ21505R SW2204 AE013551 0504101T34 SW ITCH,TACT EVQ21505R SW2205 AE013551 0504101T34 SW ITCH,TACT EVQ21505R SW2206 AE013551 0504101T34 SW ITCH,TACT EVQ21505R SW2207 AE013551 0504101T34 SW ITCH,TACT EVQ21505R SW2208 AE013551 0504101T34 SW ITCH,TACT EVQ21505R

PCB130 AE017420 A52P01C130L DVD MT PCB ASS'Y DMH104A PCB240 AE017421 A52P01C240L POW ER PCB ASS'Y CEH434A PCB270 AE017422 A52P01C270L OPERATION PCB ASS'Y CEH438A PCB290 AE017423 A52P01C290L TUNER PCB ASS'Y CEH447A PCBDA0 AE017424 A52P01CDA0L REMOCON PCB ASS'Y CEH439A PCBDH0 AE017425 A52P01CDH0L DIGITAL PCB ASS'Y CEH444A PCBF40 AE017426 A52P01CF40L MAIN PCB ASS'Y CMH143A

B102 AE007761 024AC5181J CORE,BEADS BLM18PG181SN1D B304 AE009535 024HC13914 CORE,BEADS HCB3216KF-391T20 B305 AE009535 024HC13914 CORE,BEADS HCB3216KF-391T20 B306 AE009535 024HC13914 CORE,BEADS HCB3216KF-391T20 B307 AE009535 024HC13914 CORE,BEADS HCB3216KF-391T20 B308 AE009535 024HC13914 CORE,BEADS HCB3216KF-391T20 B309 AE017380 024AC5601D CORE,BEADS BLM18HG601SN1D B310 AE017380 024AC5601D CORE,BEADS BLM18HG601SN1D B312 AE017380 024AC5601D CORE,BEADS BLM18HG601SN1D B313 AE008609 024HC51023 CORE,BEADS FCM1608KF-102T02 B501 AE013373 024HT03564 CORE,BEADS W4BRH3.5X6X1.0 B2401 AE008395 024HC56005 CORE,BEADS FCM1608CF-600T06 B3001 AE008395 024HC56005 CORE,BEADS FCM1608CF-600T06 B3002 AE008395 024HC56005 CORE,BEADS FCM1608CF-600T06 B3601 AE008610 024HC51513 CORE,BEADS FCM1608KF-151T06 B3602 AE008610 024HC51513 CORE,BEADS FCM1608KF-151T06 B3603 AE008610 024HC51513 CORE,BEADS FCM1608KF-151T06 B3604 AE008610 024HC51513 CORE,BEADS FCM1608KF-151T06 B3609 AE008610 024HC51513 CORE,BEADS FCM1608KF-151T06 B3610 AE008610 024HC51513 CORE,BEADS FCM1608KF-151T06 B3613 AE008610 024HC51513 CORE,BEADS FCM1608KF-151T06 B3801 AE008610 024HC51513 CORE,BEADS FCM1608KF-151T06 B3802 AE009374 024HC51216 CORE,BEADS HCB1608KF-121T20 B3803 AE009374 024HC51216 CORE,BEADS HCB1608KF-121T20 B3804 AE009374 024HC51216 CORE,BEADS HCB1608KF-121T20 B3805 AE009374 024HC51216 CORE,BEADS HCB1608KF-121T20 B3808 AE008878 024HC51816 CORE,BEADS HCB1608KF-181T20 B3809 AE007761 024AC5181J CORE,BEADS BLM18PG181SN1D B3810 AE007761 024AC5181J CORE,BEADS BLM18PG181SN1D B4001 AE008552 024NC51021 CORE,BEADS EBMS160808A102_RDC45 B4008 AE008552 024NC51021 CORE,BEADS EBMS160808A102_RDC45 B4010 AE016785 024AC5221F CORE,BEADS BLM18BD221SN1D B4015 AE008552 024NC51021 CORE,BEADS EBMS160808A102_RDC45 B4016 AE008552 024NC51021 CORE,BEADS EBMS160808A102_RDC45 B4201 AE008609 024HC51023 CORE,BEADS FCM1608KF-102T02 B4202 AE008395 024HC56005 CORE,BEADS FCM1608CF-600T06 B4203 AE008879 024HC56013 CORE,BEADS FCM1608KF-601T02 B4204 AE008610 024HC51513 CORE,BEADS FCM1608KF-151T06 B4205 AE008610 024HC51513 CORE,BEADS FCM1608KF-151T06 B4207 AE008609 024HC51023 CORE,BEADS FCM1608KF-102T02 B4208 AE008609 024HC51023 CORE,BEADS FCM1608KF-102T02 B4209 AE008609 024HC51023 CORE,BEADS FCM1608KF-102T02 B4228 AE008395 024HC56005 CORE,BEADS FCM1608CF-600T06 B4303 AE008395 024HC56005 CORE,BEADS FCM1608CF-600T06

TRANSISTORS

COILS &TRANSFORMERS

JACKS

SWITCHES

P.C.BOARD ASSEMBLIES

MISCELLANEOUS

K3-3 19DV616DG

Page 88

ELECTRICAL REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST

CP2301

AE008156

069KYOT159

CONNECTOR PCB SIDE

LD07T2 24ND 03

Location No.TSB P/N Reference No. Description

B4304 AE008395 024HC56005 CORE,BEADS FCM1608CF-600T06 B4305 AE008395 024HC56005 CORE,BEADS FCM1608CF-600T06 B4312 AE008395 024HC56005 CORE,BEADS FCM1608CF-600T06 B4322 AE008395 024HC56005 CORE,BEADS FCM1608CF-600T06 B4326 AE007761 024AC5181J CORE,BEADS BLM18PG181SN1D B5801 AE008879 024HC56013 CORE,BEADS FCM1608KF-601T02 B5802 AE008879 024HC56013 CORE,BEADS FCM1608KF-601T02 B5803 AE008395 024HC56005 CORE,BEADS FCM1608CF-600T06 B6100 AE008609 024HC51023 CORE,BEADS FCM1608KF-102T02 B6501 AE008609 024HC51023 CORE,BEADS FCM1608KF-102T02 B6502 AE007761 024AC5181J CORE,BEADS BLM18PG181SN1D B6503 AE008609 024HC51023 CORE,BEADS FCM1608KF-102T02 B6504 AE007761 024AC5181J CORE,BEADS BLM18PG181SN1D B7202 AE007761 024AC5181J CORE,BEADS BLM18PG181SN1D B8101 AE008610 024HC51513 CORE,BEADS FCM1608KF-151T06 B8102 AE008610 024HC51513 CORE,BEADS FCM1608KF-151T06 B8103 AE008610 024HC51513 CORE,BEADS FCM1608KF-151T06 B8104 AE008609 024HC51023 CORE,BEADS FCM1608KF-102T02 B8107 AE008609 024HC51023 CORE,BEADS FCM1608KF-102T02 B8112 AE008609 024HC51023 CORE,BEADS FCM1608KF-102T02 B8113 AE008609 024HC51023 CORE,BEADS FCM1608KF-102T02 B8501 AE008394 024BC5121J CORE,BEADS BLM18PG121SN1D B8502 AE008552 024NC51021 CORE,BEADS EBMS160808A102_RDC45 B8503 AE008394 024BC5121J CORE,BEADS BLM18PG121SN1D B8504 AE008552 024NC51021 CORE,BEADS EBMS160808A102_RDC45 BT001 AE016522 141L004019 BATTERY,MANGAN R03 (AB) 2P TG AO DB BT002 AE016522 141L004019 BATTERY,MANGAN R03 (AB) 2P TG AO DB CD301 AE017384 06E8143202 CORD CONNECTOR E8143202 ! CD501 AE016598 120Q155809 CORD AC P205-1538-1 CP101 AE009735 06GG270029 CONNECTOR PCB SIDE A2001WV-7A CP501 AE008882 06977NM020 CONNECTOR PCB SIDE 127301123K2 CP802 AE009736 06GG260029 CONNECTOR PCB SIDE A2001WV-6A CD3805 AE006481 06CPL02011 CABLE,PAL TD-OR0157F CD4301 AE017383 06CU231502 CORD CONNECTOR CU231502 CD4302 AE016792 06E8251901 CORD CONNECTOR E8251901 CD6501 AE009737 06E82M1601 CORD CONNECTOR E82M1601 CD7201 AE016787 06EA2U2510 CORD CONNECTOR EA2U2510 CP2201 AE013944 069S230639 CONNECTOR PCB SIDE A2001W R2-3P

CP2302 AE009544 069EV5T060 CONNECTOR PCB SIDE 04_6232_105_015_800+ CP2305 AE006411 069EV4T060 CONNECTOR PCB SIDE 04_6232_104_015_800+ CP2401 AE016557 069S2A0739 CONNECTOR PCB SIDE A2006W V0-2X5P CP2402 AE009743 06GG250029 CONNECTOR PCB SIDE A2001WV-5A CP3001 AE017427 063M800012 SLOT,IC 36_5027_068_515_856+ CP3002 AE017428 063M800011 HOLDER,IC 30_5027_000_500_000+ CP3601 AE009550 06GDYL3038 CONNECTOR PCB SIDE 1A0300030 CP3801 AE008886 06CK7N0301 CORD CONNECTOR TWG-P23P-A1 CP4300 AE008886 06CK7N0301 CORD CONNECTOR TWG-P23P-A1 CP4302 AE009551 06G7S21501 CONNECTOR PCB SIDE WD-00021-R CP5801 AE016559 06972U3010 CONNECTOR PCB SIDE TKC-W30P-U1 BLK ST CP5802 AE009741 06GF2G0020 CONNECTOR PCB SIDE WD-00028-R CP5803 AE009742 06GF2G0010 CONNECTOR PCB SIDE WD-00027-R CP6401 75007827 06972UT018 CONNECTOR PCB SIDE 125622330K3 CP6501 AE009549 069S2M0079 CONNECTOR PCB SIDE A2006W V0-2X11P CP7001 AE016794 069SJ20019 CONNECTOR PCB SIDE C3502WR0-2P-HK CP7002 AE016794 069SJ20019 CONNECTOR PCB SIDE C3502WR0-2P-HK CP7201 AE009548 069S2U0739 CONNECTOR PCB SIDE A2006WV0-2X15P CP7601 AE009743 06GG250029 CONNECTOR PCB SIDE A2001WV-5A CP8101 AE008882 06977NM020 CONNECTOR PCB SIDE 127301123K2 ! CP8501 AE009553 06GG2E0019 CONNECTOR PCB SIDE A2001WR-14A CP8502 AE013952 069S280639 CONNECTOR PCB SIDE A2001W R2-8P EL2401 AE014351 124116281A EYE LET XRY16X28BD EL2402 AE014352 124120301A EYE LET XRY20X30BD ! F501 AE002112 080NT2R504 FUSE 50T025H ! F7001 AE014142 0835C04003 MICRO FUSE 20N_4000FS FH501 AE002634 06710T0009 HOLDER,FUSE EYF-52BCY FH502 AE002634 06710T0009 HOLDER,FUSE EYF-52BCY NR803 AE017388 11074222M7 R,NETWORK CRA108222JV NR804 AE009557 11074470M7 R,NETWORK CRA108470JV NR805 AE009557 11074470M7 R,NETWORK CRA108470JV NR806 AE017388 11074222M7 R,NETWORK CRA108222JV NR2401 AE016560 11074560M7 R,NETWORK CRA108560JV NR2402 AE016560 11074560M7 R,NETWORK CRA108560JV NR2403 AE016560 11074560M7 R,NETWORK CRA108560JV NR2404 AE016560 11074560M7 R,NETWORK CRA108560JV NR2405 AE016560 11074560M7 R,NETWORK CRA108560JV NR2406 AE016560 11074560M7 R,NETWORK CRA108560JV NR2407 AE016560 11074560M7 R,NETWORK CRA108560JV NR2408 AE017429 11074103M7 R,NETWORK CRA108103JV NR2420 AE016560 11074560M7 R,NETWORK CRA108560JV NR2421 AE016560 11074560M7 R,NETWORK CRA108560JV NR2422 AE016560 11074560M7 R,NETWORK CRA108560JV NR3001 AE009557 11074470M7 R,NETWORK CRA108470JV NR3002 AE009557 11074470M7 R,NETWORK CRA108470JV NR3003 AE009557 11074470M7 R,NETWORK CRA108470JV NR3004 AE009557 11074470M7 R,NETWORK CRA108470JV NR3005 AE009557 11074470M7 R,NETWORK CRA108470JV NR3006 AE009557 11074470M7 R,NETWORK CRA108470JV NR3007 AE009557 11074470M7 R,NETWORK CRA108470JV NR3008 AE009557 11074470M7 R,NETWORK CRA108470JV

MISCELLANEOUS

K3-4 19DV616DG

Page 89

ELECTRICAL REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST

CMPL

METAL PLASTIC CAPACITOR

Location No.TSB P/N Reference No. Description

NR3009 AE009557 11074470M7 R,NETWORK CRA108470JV NR3010 AE009557 11074470M7 R,NETWORK CRA108470JV NR3011 AE009557 11074470M7 R,NETWORK CRA108470JV NR3601 AE016524 11074330M7 R,NETWORK CRA108330JV NR3602 AE016524 11074330M7 R,NETWORK CRA108330JV NR3603 AE016524 11074330M7 R,NETWORK CRA108330JV NR3604 AE016524 11074330M7 R,NETWORK CRA108330JV NR3605 AE016524 11074330M7 R,NETWORK CRA108330JV NR3606 AE016524 11074330M7 R,NETWORK CRA108330JV NR6127 AE009744 11074000M7 R,NETWORK CRA108000JV NR6128 AE009744 11074000M7 R,NETWORK CRA108000JV NR6129 AE009744 11074000M7 R,NETWORK CRA108000JV OS7601 AE016561 077Q038009 REMOTE RECEIVER KSM-2003TCW2P SH501 AE009776 126D000045 TERMINAL PIN YQ-12 ! SP301 AE009558 070Y433004 SPEAKER S0308F01 ! SP302 AE009558 070Y433004 SPEAKER S0308F01 ! TH501 AE009559 DSQDNE5R0L THERMISTOR 5D2-08LCS TM101 AE016648 076D0QJ041 TRANSMITTER 000-103000590 ! TU5801 AE017260 0164Y03004 DIGITAL TUNER TDTG-S186D ! V7201 AE016796 09EA118503 LCD M185XW 01 V0 X101 AE009387 100GT01616 CRYSTAL B16000E011 X801 AE017387 100GT02010 CRYSTAL SMD-49 X2401 AE009566 100GT02727 CRYSTAL SMD-49 C27000J029 X3602 AE008624 100DT02801 CRYST AL SMD-49 X4001 AE009566 100GT02727 CRYSTAL SMD-49 C27000J029 X6101 AE009566 100GT02727 CRYSTAL SMD-49 C27000J029

RESISTOR

CAPACITORS

RC..................

CC..................

CE................... ALUMI ELECTROLYTIC CAPACITOR

CP................... POLYESTER CAPACITOR

CPP................

CPL................. PLASTIC CAPACITOR

CMP................ METAL POLYESTER CAPACITOR

CMPP..............METAL POLYPROPYLENE CAPACITOR

CARBON RESISTOR

CERAMIC CAPACITOR

POLYPROPYLENE CAPACITOR

..............

MISCELLANEOUS

K3-5 19DV616DG

Page 90

ELECTRICAL REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST

D510

AE016750

D4JXRM11C0

DIODE SILICON

ZRM11C

Location No. TSB P/N Reference No. Description

! R503 75006901 RC31X1126J RC 12M OHM 1W ! R506 AE002150 R803R9333J RC 33K OHM 1/16W ! R509 AE009486 RC31X1125J RC 1.2M OHM 1W ! R510 AE005735 R63881R22J R,FUSE 0.22 OHM 1W ! R512 AE017411 R3K781823J R,METAL OXIDE 82K OHM 1W ! R518 AE012427 R002T4101J RC 100 OHM 1/4W ! R544 AE009808 R861R42R0F RC 2 OHM 1/4W ! R545 AE009808 R861R42R0F RC 2 OHM 1/4W ! R546 AE009808 R861R42R0F RC 2 OHM 1/4W ! R547 AE009808 R861R42R0F RC 2 OHM 1/4W ! R7023 AE016831 R63884100J R,FUSE 10 OHM 1/4W

! C501 AE001726 CS0PB0414K CC 0.01 UF 50V B ! C502 AE017408 E83FHH101D CE 100 UF 400V ! C503 AE001729 CS0PCH412J CC 100 PF 50V CH ! C504 AE009918 E83YF1222D CE 2200 UF 10V ! C505 AE011289 CS0PCH4S1J CC 56 PF 50V CH ! C506 AE016469 P4K12D224K CMPP 0.22 UF 310V ! C507 AE011227 CD39E0M13M CC 0.001 UF 250V ! C508 AE016468 P4K12D104K CMPP 0.1 UF 310V ! C513 AE011367 C0PLRR7Q2K CC 470 PF 2KV R ! C514 AE000308 CD39B0MQ2K CC 470 PF 250V C518 AE009492 P332E4223J CPP 0.022 UF 400V ! C520 75007051 E8E2U54R7D CE 4.7 UF 50V ! C522 AE016832 E83YT3471D CE 470 UF 25V ! C525 AE017409 E83YF4102D CE 1000 UF 35V ! C534 AE011227 CD39E0M13M CC 0.001 UF 250V ! C3840 75007767 CS7RC0N17M CC 10 UF 10V C C7023 AE016833 C234SLBE1J CC 15 PF 6KV SL C7026 AE016833 C234SLBE1J CC 15 PF 6KV SL C7027 AE016833 C234SLBE1J CC 15 PF 6KV SL C7030 AE016833 C234SLBE1J CC 15 PF 6KV SL

! D504 AE017221 D7KE103020 DIODE VARISTA S10K300E2S5M4 ! D505 AE011447 D2WXN40050 DIODE SILICON 1N4005-EIC D506 AE008906 D28R11FS20 DIODE EC11FS2-TE12L ! D507 AE016750 D4JXRM11C0 DIODE SILICON ZRM11C ! D508 AE016750 D4JXRM11C0 DIODE SILICON ZRM11C

D511 AE009496 D28R11FS40 DIODE SCHOTTKY EC11FS4-TE12L D512 AE002133 D2BXARS010 DIODE SILICON SARS01-V1 ! D514 AE011449 D2WXRU2AM0 DIODE SILICON RU2AM-EIC ! D515 AE016834 D28AH10A20 DIODE SCHOTTKY BARRIER FCH10A20 ! D516 AE008319 D4AT01H3E0 DIODE RECTIFIER 1H3-E D517 AE011502 D97U01601B DIODE ZENER MTZJ16B T-77 ! D518 AE016750 D4JXRM11C0 DIODE SILICON ZRM11C ! D523 AE017407 D28A10A061 DIODE SCHOTTKY BARRIER FCQS10A065 D524 AE011514 D97U03301B DIODE,ZENER MTZJ33B T-77 D525 AE004643 D28R1QS040 DIODE EC31QS04-TE12L D526 AE011506 D97U02201B DIODE ZENER MTZJ22B T-77 D527 AE011514 D97U03301B DIODE,ZENER MTZJ33B T-77 D804 AE009006 DGERMA1110 DIODE SILICON MA111-(TX) D805 AE009498 DGJRT54WS0 DIODE SCHOTTKY BARRIER BAT54WS D1001 AE009006 DGERMA1110 DIODE SILICON MA111-(TX) D1002 AE009498 DGJRT54W S0 DIODE SCHOTTKY BARRIER BAT54W S D2303 AE009006 DGERMA1110 DIODE SILICON MA111-(TX) D2304 AE009006 DGERMA1110 DIODE SILICON MA111-(TX) D2402 AE009006 DGERMA1110 DIODE SILICON MA111-(TX) D2403 AE009006 DGERMA1110 DIODE SILICON MA111-(TX) D3201 75006232 D4CRSK34A0 DIODE SCHOTTKY SK34A D3600 AE009498 DGJRT54W S0 DIODE SCHOTTKY BARRIER BAT54W S D3601 AE016757 D61R0V8001 DIODE VARISTA EZJZ0V80010 D3603 AE016757 D61R0V8001 DIODE VARISTA EZJZ0V80010 D3605 AE009497 DDLRS160T0 DIODE SCHOTTKY BARRIER SS160-T D3804 AE008906 D28R11FS20 DIODE EC11FS2-TE12L ! D3805 75006232 D4CRSK34A0 DIODE SCHOTTKY SK34A ! D3806 AE004643 D28R1QS040 DIODE EC31QS04-TE12L D3807 AE009716 DE7RB1302B DIODE ZENER UDZSNP13B TE-17 D3809 AE009006 DGERMA1110 DIODE SILICON MA111-(TX) D4008 AE009006 DGERMA1110 DIODE SILICON MA111-(TX) D4211 AE008091 DE7RB4R72B DIODE ZENER UDZSNP4.7B TE-17 D6402 AE009006 DGERMA1110 DIODE SILICON MA111-(TX) D6403 75006232 D4CRSK34A0 DIODE SCHOTTKY SK34A D7001 AE009006 DGERMA1110 DIODE SILICON MA111-(TX) D7002 AE011421 D1VT001330 DIODE,SILICON 1SS133T-77 D7003 AE011421 D1VT001330 DIODE,SILICON 1SS133T-77 D7004 AE009006 DGERMA1110 DIODE SILICON MA111-(TX) D7005 AE009006 DGERMA1110 DIODE SILICON MA111-(TX) D7006 AE009006 DGERMA1110 DIODE SILICON MA111-(TX) D7007 AE009006 DGERMA1110 DIODE SILICON MA111-(TX) D7008 AE009006 DGERMA1110 DIODE SILICON MA111-(TX) D7009 AE009006 DGERMA1110 DIODE SILICON MA111-(TX) D7010 AE009006 DGERMA1110 DIODE SILICON MA111-(TX) D7011 AE009006 DGERMA1110 DIODE SILICON MA111-(TX) D7012 AE009006 DGERMA1110 DIODE SILICON MA111-(TX) D7013 AE009006 DGERMA1110 DIODE SILICON MA111-(TX) D7014 AE009006 DGERMA1110 DIODE SILICON MA111-(TX) D7015 AE011421 D1VT001330 DIODE,SILICON 1SS133T-77 D7016 AE009006 DGERMA1110 DIODE SILICON MA111-(TX) D7601 AE000288 0021E9Q010 LED LTL-1BEFJ-002A

RESISTORS

CAPACITORS

DIODES

K3-6 22DV616DG

Page 91

ELECTRICAL REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST

IC6407

AE017228

I1ZF9251D0

REGULATOR 2.5V

RP131H251D-T1-F

Location No. TSB P/N Reference No. Description

D8510 AE009006 DGERMA1110 DIODE SILICON MA111-(TX)

! IC301 AE008430 I03SP20520 SOUND AMP 5W 2CH LA42052-E ! IC501 AE016759 ICAL055710 POW ER IC CONTROL FA5571N-D1-TE1 ! IC502 AE011889 I1KJ9A431A VARIABLE SHUNT REGULATOR TAPE KIA431A-AT IC504 AE017449 I53F958030 STEP DOW N SW REG LV5803M-TE-L-E ! IC505 AE002809 000220002W PHOTO COUPLER PS2561AL1-1-V(W) IC801 AE017450 S52Q01AE01 MEMORY DATA EEPROM 256K I2C AT24C256BN-SH-T IC802 AE011998 I9UF032290 RESET IC 2.9V TYPE PST3229NR ! IC2301 AE008194 I03FV65650 5CH MOTOR DRIVER IC LA6565VR-TLM-E IC2401 AE011746 I5PK05ALC0 MPEG DECORDER STI5105ALC IC2402 AE011999 I9UF032310 RESET IC 3.1V TYPE PST3231NR IC2403 AE017231 ICLJ022FC5 DDR-400 256M CL=3 HY5DU561622FTP-D43-C IC2409 AE017232 ICRJ064CN0 EEPROM 64K SOIC AT24C64CN-SH-T IC3001 75007780 I55F045FT0 8BIT BUS TRANSCEIVER TC74LCX245FT(EL) IC3002 75007782 I55J0X2440 20PIN LOW VOLTAGE BUS BUFFER TC74LCX244FT(EL,K) IC3003 75007782 I55J0X2440 20PIN LOW VOLTAGE BUS BUFFER TC74LCX244FT(EL,K) IC3004 75007782 I55J0X2440 20PIN LOW VOLTAGE BUS BUFFER TC74LCX244FT(EL,K) IC3005 75007782 I55J0X2440 20PIN LOW VOLTAGE BUS BUFFER TC74LCX244FT(EL,K) IC3006 75007781 I55J0CX020 2 INPUT NOR GATE TC74LCX02FT(EL) IC3007 75007779 I55F0125F0 BUS BUFFER TC7SH125FU(TE85L,F ! IC3202 AE016764 I07F993230 DC-DC CONVERTER 3.0A BD9323EFJ ! IC3204 AE017227 I1ZF9181D0 REGULATOR 1.8V RP131H181D-T1-F ! IC3205 AE017410 I1ZF9501D0 REGULATOR 5V RP131H501D-T1-F ! IC3206 AE008431 I07F078200 VARIABLE REG LOW INPUT IO=1A BD7820FP-E2 IC3605 75007789 IG1F090250 144PIN TQFP HDMI RECEIVER SII9025CTU IC3606 AE017237 S52R02AE02 MEMORY DATA EEPROM 2K 12C S-24CS02AFJ-TB-GE ! IC3801 AE007825 I07F0C0WF0 1A REGULATOR BA00BC0WFP-E2 ! IC3806 AE017410 I1ZF9501D0 REGULATOR 5V RP131H501D-T1-F IC4001 AE009720 ICQK06966A VADDIS9 MPEG/MICON/DSP/RF-AMP ZR36966ELCG-D-G IC4005 AE016766 IG2J081656 SDRAM 166MHZ 4*16MBIT 54PIN EM638165TS-6G(0.11UM-N) IC4202 AE001069 I0UF015020 A/V SW 2INPUT 1OUTPUT 6DBAMP MM1502XNRE IC4205 AE004651 I0QF025840 A/V SW 2INPUT 1OUTPUT NJM2584AM(TE1) IC5801 AE017230 I55L0053A0 3X2CH MULTIPLEXER TSSOP TC74VHC4053AFT(E,K IC6101 75007784 I5PK003620 DVB-T SINGLE CHIP RECEIVER STV0362 ! IC6401 AE017229 I1ZF9331D0 REGULATOR 3.3V RP131H331D-T1-F ! IC6405 AE017228 I1ZF9251D0 REGULATOR 2.5V RP131H251D-T1-F IC6406 AE002504 I0QF0580V0 AUDIO OPERATION AMP NJM4580V(TE1)

! IC6408 AE017226 I1ZF9121D0 REGULATOR 1.2V RP131H121D-T1-F ! IC6409 AE017225 I1ZF9101D0 REGULATOR 1V RP131H101D-T1-F IC6500 AE009928 I55F0A53FU A/V SW 2IN 1OUT TC7PA53FU(T5L,F,T) IC6501 AE011796 I0UF015010 A/V SW 2INPUT 1OUTPUT MM1501XNRE IC6502 AE011796 I0UF015010 A/V SW 2INPUT 1OUTPUT MM1501XNRE IC7001 AE016837 I1JF010080 1CH HALF-BRIDGE INVERTER IC MP1008-ES-LF-Z IC8501 AE009365 I0QF045650 DUAL OPEAMP NJM4565M(TE1) ! IC8502 AE009805 I1YF9117A0 VO=ADJ IO=1A TAPING LD1117AL-ADJ-AA3-A-R

Q101 AE016772 T27T035410 FET 2SK3541_T2L Q102 AE016772 T27T035410 FET 2SK3541_T2L ! Q501 AE009722 T41GK35320 FET 2SK3532-01MR Q505 AE012926 TAAA1504SY TRANSISTOR SILICON KTA1504S_Y_RTK Q1001 AE013032 TPAAB05001 COMPOUND TRANSISTOR KRA102SRTK Q1002 AE012951 TCAA3875SY TRANSISTOR SILICON KTC3875S_Y_RTK Q1003 AE012951 TCAA3875SY TRANSISTOR SILICON KTC3875S_Y_RTK Q1004 AE012926 TAAA1504SY TRANSISTOR SILICON KTA1504S_Y_RTK Q1005 AE013031 TPAAA05001 COMPOUND TRANSISTOR KRA101SRTK Q1006 AE012951 TCAA3875SY TRANSISTOR SILICON KTC3875S_Y_RTK Q1008 AE013010 TNAAB05003 COMPOUND TRANSISTOR KRC102SRTK Q2301 AE012926 TAAA1504SY TRANSISTOR SILICON KTA1504S_Y_RTK Q2302 AE008330 TAAA1505SY TRANSISTOR SILICON KTA1505S-Y-RTK/P Q3002 AE012951 TCAA3875SY TRANSISTOR SILICON KTC3875S_Y_RTK Q3003 AE012951 TCAA3875SY TRANSISTOR SILICON KTC3875S_Y_RTK Q3004 AE009621 TL4A01664Y TRANSISTOR SILICON KTA1664-Y(GP) ! Q3200 AE009621 TL4A01664Y TRANSISTOR SILICON KTA1664-Y(GP) Q3201 AE012951 TCAA3875SY TRANSISTOR SILICON KTC3875S_Y_RTK Q3205 AE012951 TCAA3875SY TRANSISTOR SILICON KTC3875S_Y_RTK ! Q3206 AE009621 TL4A01664Y TRANSISTOR SILICON KTA1664-Y(GP) ! Q3207 AE009621 TL4A01664Y TRANSISTOR SILICON KTA1664-Y(GP) Q3208 AE012951 TCAA3875SY TRANSISTOR SILICON KTC3875S_Y_RTK Q3601 AE016772 T27T035410 FET 2SK3541_T2L Q3602 AE012951 TCAA3875SY TRANSISTOR SILICON KTC3875S_Y_RTK Q3603 AE016772 T27T035410 FET 2SK3541_T2L Q3604 AE016772 T27T035410 FET 2SK3541_T2L Q3605 AE016772 T27T035410 FET 2SK3541_T2L Q3618 AE016772 T27T035410 FET 2SK3541_T2L ! Q3801 AE009514 TJ7T35P020 FET RTQ035P02-TR Q3802 AE013010 TNAAB05003 COMPOUND TRANSISTOR KRC102SRTK Q3803 AE013010 TNAAB05003 COMPOUND TRANSISTOR KRC102SRTK Q3804 AE012951 TCAA3875SY TRANSISTOR SILICON KTC3875S_Y_RTK ! Q3805 AE009621 TL4A01664Y TRANSISTOR SILICON KTA1664-Y(GP) Q3808 AE013010 TNAAB05003 COMPOUND TRANSISTOR KRC102SRTK ! Q3809 AE009514 TJ7T35P020 FET RTQ035P02-TR ! Q3810 AE016771 TK9A3443B0 FET SI3443BDV-T1-E3 Q3811 AE013033 TPAAC05002 COMPOUND TRANSISTOR KRA103SRTK Q3812 AE013011 TNAAC05002 COMPOUND TRANSISTOR KRC103SRTK Q4200 AE012951 TCAA3875SY TRANSISTOR SILICON KTC3875S_Y_RTK Q4201 AE012926 TAAA1504SY TRANSISTOR SILICON KTA1504S_Y_RTK Q4205 AE012951 TCAA3875SY TRANSISTOR SILICON KTC3875S_Y_RTK Q4210 AE012951 TCAA3875SY TRANSISTOR SILICON KTC3875S_Y_RTK

DIODES

ICS

TRANSISTORS

K3-7 22DV616DG

Page 92

ELECTRICAL REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST

J8102

AE009527

060R411058

RCA JACK

RCA-341H(NI)-09

Location No. TSB P/N Reference No. Description

Q4217 AE013033 TPAAC05002 COMPOUND TRANSISTOR KRA103SRTK Q4218 AE013010 TNAAB05003 COMPOUND TRANSISTOR KRC102SRTK Q4303 AE012951 TCAA3875SY TRANSISTOR SILICON KTC3875S_Y_RTK Q4304 AE012951 TCAA3875SY TRANSISTOR SILICON KTC3875S_Y_RTK Q4305 AE013032 TPAAB05001 COMPOUND TRANSISTOR KRA102SRTK Q4306 AE012951 TCAA3875SY TRANSISTOR SILICON KTC3875S_Y_RTK Q4307 AE012951 TCAA3875SY TRANSISTOR SILICON KTC3875S_Y_RTK Q4308 AE013032 TPAAB05001 COMPOUND TRANSISTOR KRA102SRTK ! Q7001 AE016838 TJ3MTP2070 FET ATP207-S-TL-H Q7002 AE012951 TCAA3875SY TRANSISTOR SILICON KTC3875S_Y_RTK Q7003 AE012951 TCAA3875SY TRANSISTOR SILICON KTC3875S_Y_RTK Q7004 AE012951 TCAA3875SY TRANSISTOR SILICON KTC3875S_Y_RTK ! Q7005 AE016838 TJ3MTP2070 FET ATP207-S-TL-H Q7006 AE012951 TCAA3875SY TRANSISTOR SILICON KTC3875S_Y_RTK Q7007 AE012951 TCAA3875SY TRANSISTOR SILICON KTC3875S_Y_RTK Q7008 AE012951 TCAA3875SY TRANSISTOR SILICON KTC3875S_Y_RTK Q7009 AE012951 TCAA3875SY TRANSISTOR SILICON KTC3875S_Y_RTK Q7010 AE012951 TCAA3875SY TRANSISTOR SILICON KTC3875S_Y_RTK

! L501 AE009366 029X000121 COIL,LINE FILTER SS24H-K08240-CH L503 AE013323 02167E220K COIL 22 UH L504 AE013322 02167E100K COIL 10 UH L505 AE017419 02120K100M COIL 10 UH L3201 AE016774 021UMK100P COIL 10 UH L3202 AE016774 021UMK100P COIL 10 UH L3601 AE009519 02D1000119 COIL CHOKE EXC28CG900U L3602 AE009519 02D1000119 COIL CHOKE EXC28CG900U L8502 AE016775 021ES11R0K COIL 1 UH ! T501 AE017382 0481280278 TRANSFORMER,SWITCHING 81280278 ! T7001 AE016841 048137002R TRANSFORMER,SW ITCHING 8137002R ! T7002 AE016841 048137002R TRANSFORMER,SW ITCHING 8137002R

J8103 AE009528 060R431039 RCA JACK RCA-228H(3)NI-02 J8104 AE009529 060R431040 RCA JACK RCA-341H(2)NI-06

SW2201 AE013551 0504101T34 SWITCH,TACT EVQ21505R SW2202 AE013551 0504101T34 SWITCH,TACT EVQ21505R SW2203 AE013551 0504101T34 SWITCH,TACT EVQ21505R SW2204 AE013551 0504101T34 SWITCH,TACT EVQ21505R SW2205 AE013551 0504101T34 SWITCH,TACT EVQ21505R SW2206 AE013551 0504101T34 SWITCH,TACT EVQ21505R SW2207 AE013551 0504101T34 SWITCH,TACT EVQ21505R SW2208 AE013551 0504101T34 SWITCH,TACT EVQ21505R

PCB130 AE017453 A52Q01A130L DVD MT PCB ASS'Y DMH104A PCB240 AE017454 A52Q01A240L POW ER PCB ASS'Y CEH433B PCB270 AE017455 A52Q01A270L OPERATION PCB ASS'Y CEH436B PCB290 AE017456 A52Q01A290L TUNER PCB ASS'Y CEH447A PCBDA0 AE017457 A52Q01ADA0L REMOCON PCB ASS'Y CEH437B PCBDH0 AE017458 A52Q01ADH0L DIGITAL PCB ASS'Y CEH444A PCBF40 AE017459 A52Q01AF40L MAIN PCB ASS'Y CMH143A

TRANSISTORS

COILS &TRANSFORMERS

JACKS

SWITCHES

P.C.BOARD ASSEMBLIES

MISCELLANEOUS

B102 AE007761 024AC5181J CORE,BEADS BLM18PG181SN1D B304 AE009535 024HC13914 CORE,BEADS HCB3216KF-391T20 B305 AE009535 024HC13914 CORE,BEADS HCB3216KF-391T20 B306 AE009535 024HC13914 CORE,BEADS HCB3216KF-391T20 B307 AE009535 024HC13914 CORE,BEADS HCB3216KF-391T20 B308 AE009535 024HC13914 CORE,BEADS HCB3216KF-391T20 B309 AE017380 024AC5601D CORE,BEADS BLM18HG601SN1D B310 AE017380 024AC5601D CORE,BEADS BLM18HG601SN1D B312 AE017380 024AC5601D CORE,BEADS BLM18HG601SN1D B313 AE008609 024HC51023 CORE,BEADS FCM1608KF-102T02 B501 AE013373 024HT03564 CORE,BEADS W 4BRH3.5X6X1.0 B2401 AE008395 024HC56005 CORE,BEADS FCM1608CF-600T06 B3001 AE008395 024HC56005 CORE,BEADS FCM1608CF-600T06 B3002 AE008395 024HC56005 CORE,BEADS FCM1608CF-600T06 B3601 AE008610 024HC51513 CORE,BEADS FCM1608KF-151T06 B3602 AE008610 024HC51513 CORE,BEADS FCM1608KF-151T06 B3603 AE008610 024HC51513 CORE,BEADS FCM1608KF-151T06 B3604 AE008610 024HC51513 CORE,BEADS FCM1608KF-151T06 B3609 AE008610 024HC51513 CORE,BEADS FCM1608KF-151T06 B3610 AE008610 024HC51513 CORE,BEADS FCM1608KF-151T06 B3613 AE008610 024HC51513 CORE,BEADS FCM1608KF-151T06 B3801 AE008610 024HC51513 CORE,BEADS FCM1608KF-151T06 B3802 AE009374 024HC51216 CORE,BEADS HCB1608KF-121T20 B3803 AE009374 024HC51216 CORE,BEADS HCB1608KF-121T20 B3804 AE009374 024HC51216 CORE,BEADS HCB1608KF-121T20 B3805 AE009374 024HC51216 CORE,BEADS HCB1608KF-121T20 B3808 AE008878 024HC51816 CORE,BEADS HCB1608KF-181T20 B3809 AE007761 024AC5181J CORE,BEADS BLM18PG181SN1D B3810 AE007761 024AC5181J CORE,BEADS BLM18PG181SN1D B4001 AE008552 024NC51021 CORE,BEADS EBMS160808A102_RDC45 B4008 AE008552 024NC51021 CORE,BEADS EBMS160808A102_RDC45

K3-8 22DV616DG

Page 93

ELECTRICAL REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST

BT001

AE016522

141L004019

BATTERY,MANGAN

R03(AB)2PTGAODB

Location No. TSB P/N Reference No. Description

B4010 AE016785 024AC5221F CORE,BEADS BLM18BD221SN1D B4015 AE008552 024NC51021 CORE,BEADS EBMS160808A102_RDC45 B4016 AE008552 024NC51021 CORE,BEADS EBMS160808A102_RDC45 B4201 AE008609 024HC51023 CORE,BEADS FCM1608KF-102T02 B4202 AE008395 024HC56005 CORE,BEADS FCM1608CF-600T06 B4203 AE008879 024HC56013 CORE,BEADS FCM1608KF-601T02 B4204 AE008610 024HC51513 CORE,BEADS FCM1608KF-151T06 B4205 AE008610 024HC51513 CORE,BEADS FCM1608KF-151T06 B4207 AE008609 024HC51023 CORE,BEADS FCM1608KF-102T02 B4208 AE008609 024HC51023 CORE,BEADS FCM1608KF-102T02 B4209 AE008609 024HC51023 CORE,BEADS FCM1608KF-102T02 B4228 AE008395 024HC56005 CORE,BEADS FCM1608CF-600T06 B4303 AE008395 024HC56005 CORE,BEADS FCM1608CF-600T06 B4304 AE008395 024HC56005 CORE,BEADS FCM1608CF-600T06 B4305 AE008395 024HC56005 CORE,BEADS FCM1608CF-600T06 B4312 AE008395 024HC56005 CORE,BEADS FCM1608CF-600T06 B4322 AE008395 024HC56005 CORE,BEADS FCM1608CF-600T06 B4326 AE007761 024AC5181J CORE,BEADS BLM18PG181SN1D B5801 AE008879 024HC56013 CORE,BEADS FCM1608KF-601T02 B5802 AE008879 024HC56013 CORE,BEADS FCM1608KF-601T02 B5803 AE008395 024HC56005 CORE,BEADS FCM1608CF-600T06 B6100 AE008609 024HC51023 CORE,BEADS FCM1608KF-102T02 B6501 AE008609 024HC51023 CORE,BEADS FCM1608KF-102T02 B6502 AE007761 024AC5181J CORE,BEADS BLM18PG181SN1D B6503 AE008609 024HC51023 CORE,BEADS FCM1608KF-102T02 B6504 AE007761 024AC5181J CORE,BEADS BLM18PG181SN1D B7202 AE007761 024AC5181J CORE,BEADS BLM18PG181SN1D B8101 AE008610 024HC51513 CORE,BEADS FCM1608KF-151T06 B8102 AE008610 024HC51513 CORE,BEADS FCM1608KF-151T06 B8103 AE008610 024HC51513 CORE,BEADS FCM1608KF-151T06 B8109 AE008609 024HC51023 CORE,BEADS FCM1608KF-102T02 B8110 AE008609 024HC51023 CORE,BEADS FCM1608KF-102T02 B8111 AE008609 024HC51023 CORE,BEADS FCM1608KF-102T02 B8112 AE008609 024HC51023 CORE,BEADS FCM1608KF-102T02 B8501 AE008394 024BC5121J CORE,BEADS BLM18PG121SN1D B8502 AE008552 024NC51021 CORE,BEADS EBMS160808A102_RDC45 B8503 AE008394 024BC5121J CORE,BEADS BLM18PG121SN1D B8504 AE008552 024NC51021 CORE,BEADS EBMS160808A102_RDC45

BT002 AE016522 141L004019 BATTERY,MANGAN R03 (AB) 2P TG AO DB CD301 AE016848 06E8142201 CORD CONNECTOR E8142201 ! CD501 AE016598 120Q155809 CORD AC P205-1538-1 CP101 AE009735 06GG270029 CONNECTOR PCB SIDE A2001W V-7A CP501 AE008882 06977NM020 CONNECTOR PCB SIDE 127301123K2 CP802 AE009736 06GG260029 CONNECTOR PCB SIDE A2001W V-6A CD3805 AE006481 06CPL02011 CABLE,PAL TD-OR0157F CD4301 AE017383 06CU231502 CORD CONNECTOR CU231502 CD4302 AE016792 06E8251901 CORD CONNECTOR E8251901 CD6501 AE009737 06E82M1601 CORD CONNECTOR E82M1601 CD7201 AE016849 122H0U1802 CORD JUMPER 2H0U1802 CP2201 AE013944 069S230639 CONNECTOR PCB SIDE A2001WR2-3P CP2301 AE008156 069KYOT159 CONNECTOR PCB SIDE LD07T2-24ND-03 CP2302 AE009544 069EV5T060 CONNECTOR PCB SIDE 04_6232_105_015_800+ CP2305 AE006411 069EV4T060 CONNECTOR PCB SIDE 04_6232_104_015_800+ CP2401 AE016557 069S2A0739 CONNECTOR PCB SIDE A2006WV0-2X5P CP2402 AE009743 06GG250029 CONNECTOR PCB SIDE A2001W V-5A CP3001 AE017427 063M800012 SLOT,IC 36_5027_068_515_856+ CP3002 AE017428 063M800011 HOLDER,IC 30_5027_000_500_000+ CP3601 AE009550 06GDYL3038 CONNECTOR PCB SIDE 1A0300030 CP3801 AE008886 06CK7N0301 CORD CONNECTOR TW G-P23P-A1 CP4300 AE008886 06CK7N0301 CORD CONNECTOR TW G-P23P-A1 CP4302 AE009551 06G7S21501 CONNECTOR PCB SIDE W D-00021-R CP5801 AE016559 06972U3010 CONNECTOR PCB SIDE TKC-W30P-U1 BLK ST CP5802 AE009741 06GF2G0020 CONNECTOR PCB SIDE WD-00028-R CP5803 AE009742 06GF2G0010 CONNECTOR PCB SIDE WD-00027-R CP6401 75007827 06972UT018 CONNECTOR PCB SIDE 125622330K3 CP6501 AE009549 069S2M0079 CONNECTOR PCB SIDE A2006WV0-2X11P CP7001 AE016794 069SJ20019 CONNECTOR PCB SIDE C3502W R0-2P-HK CP7002 AE016794 069SJ20019 CONNECTOR PCB SIDE C3502W R0-2P-HK CP7003 AE016794 069SJ20019 CONNECTOR PCB SIDE C3502W R0-2P-HK CP7004 AE016794 069SJ20019 CONNECTOR PCB SIDE C3502W R0-2P-HK CP7202 AE006528 069EVU3030 CONNECTOR PCB SIDE 00_6232_030_006_800+ CP7601 AE009743 06GG250029 CONNECTOR PCB SIDE A2001W V-5A CP8101 AE008882 06977NM020 CONNECTOR PCB SIDE 127301123K2 ! CP8501 AE009553 06GG2E0019 CONNECTOR PCB SIDE A2001WR-14A CP8502 AE013952 069S280639 CONNECTOR PCB SIDE A2001WR2-8P EL2401 AE014351 124116281A EYE LET XRY16X28BD EL2402 AE014352 124120301A EYE LET XRY20X30BD ! F501 AE002112 080NT2R504 FUSE 50T025H ! F502 AE016850 0845500501 IC PROTECTOR 1206FA500MA-T ! F7001 AE014142 0835C04003 MICRO FUSE 20N_4000FS FH501 AE017030 067A0T0011 HOLDER,FUSE CNT47-0003A FH502 AE017030 067A0T0011 HOLDER,FUSE CNT47-0003A NR803 AE017388 11074222M7 R,NETW ORK CRA108222JV NR804 AE009557 11074470M7 R,NETW ORK CRA108470JV NR805 AE009557 11074470M7 R,NETW ORK CRA108470JV NR806 AE017388 11074222M7 R,NETW ORK CRA108222JV NR2401 AE016560 11074560M7 R,NETW ORK CRA108560JV NR2402 AE016560 11074560M7 R,NETW ORK CRA108560JV NR2403 AE016560 11074560M7 R,NETW ORK CRA108560JV

MISCELLANEOUS

K3-9 22DV616DG

Page 94

ELECTRICAL REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST

X2401

AE009566

100GT02727

CRYSTAL

SMD 49 C27000J029

Location No. TSB P/N Reference No. Description

NR2404 AE016560 11074560M7 R,NETW ORK CRA108560JV NR2405 AE016560 11074560M7 R,NETW ORK CRA108560JV NR2406 AE016560 11074560M7 R,NETW ORK CRA108560JV NR2407 AE016560 11074560M7 R,NETW ORK CRA108560JV NR2408 AE017429 11074103M7 R,NETW ORK CRA108103JV NR2420 AE016560 11074560M7 R,NETW ORK CRA108560JV NR2421 AE016560 11074560M7 R,NETW ORK CRA108560JV NR2422 AE016560 11074560M7 R,NETW ORK CRA108560JV NR3001 AE009557 11074470M7 R,NETW ORK CRA108470JV NR3002 AE009557 11074470M7 R,NETW ORK CRA108470JV NR3003 AE009557 11074470M7 R,NETW ORK CRA108470JV NR3004 AE009557 11074470M7 R,NETW ORK CRA108470JV NR3005 AE009557 11074470M7 R,NETW ORK CRA108470JV NR3006 AE009557 11074470M7 R,NETW ORK CRA108470JV NR3007 AE009557 11074470M7 R,NETW ORK CRA108470JV NR3008 AE009557 11074470M7 R,NETW ORK CRA108470JV NR3009 AE009557 11074470M7 R,NETW ORK CRA108470JV NR3010 AE009557 11074470M7 R,NETW ORK CRA108470JV NR3011 AE009557 11074470M7 R,NETW ORK CRA108470JV NR3601 AE016524 11074330M7 R,NETW ORK CRA108330JV NR3602 AE016524 11074330M7 R,NETW ORK CRA108330JV NR3603 AE016524 11074330M7 R,NETW ORK CRA108330JV NR3604 AE016524 11074330M7 R,NETW ORK CRA108330JV NR3605 AE016524 11074330M7 R,NETW ORK CRA108330JV NR3606 AE016524 11074330M7 R,NETW ORK CRA108330JV NR6127 AE009744 11074000M7 R,NETW ORK CRA108000JV NR6128 AE009744 11074000M7 R,NETW ORK CRA108000JV NR6129 AE009744 11074000M7 R,NETW ORK CRA108000JV OS7601 AE016561 077Q038009 REMOTE RECEIVER KSM-2003TCW 2P SH501 AE009776 126D000045 TERMINAL PIN YQ-12 ! SP301 AE009558 070Y433004 SPEAKER S0308F01 ! SP302 AE009558 070Y433004 SPEAKER S0308F01 ! TH501 AE009559 DSQDNE5R0L THERMISTOR 5D2-08LCS TM101 AE016648 076D0QJ041 TRANSMITTER 000-103000590 ! TU5801 AE017260 0164Y03004 DIGITAL TUNER TDTG-S186D ! V7201 AE016851 09EV121601 LCD V216B1-L01 V216B1-L01 X101 AE009387 100GT01616 CRYSTAL B16000E011 X801 AE017387 100GT02010 CRYSTAL SMD-49

X3602 AE008624 100DT02801 CRYSTAL SMD-49 X4001 AE009566 100GT02727 CRYSTAL SMD-49 C27000J029 X6101 AE009566 100GT02727 CRYSTAL SMD-49 C27000J029

RESISTOR

CAPACITORS

RC..................

CC..................

CE................... ALUMI ELECTROLYTIC CAPACITOR

CP................... POLYESTER CAPACITOR

CPP................

CPL................. PLASTIC CAPACITOR

CMP................ METAL POLYESTER CAPACITOR

CMPL.............. METAL PLASTIC CAPACITOR

CMPP.............

CARBON RESISTOR

CERAMIC CAPACITOR

POLYPROPYLENE CAPACITOR

METAL POLYPROPYLENE CAPACITOR

MISCELLANEOUS

K3-10 22DV616DG

Page 95

TOSHIBA CORPORATION

1-1, SHIBAURA 1-CHOME, MINATO-KU, TOKYO 105-8001, JAPAN

Page 96

FILE NO. 810-200967GR

SERVICE MANUAL

LCD TV/DVD COMBINATION

19DV616DG 22DV616DG

The above models are classified as green products (*1), as indicated by the underlined serial numbers.

This Service Manual describes replacement parts for the green products. When repairing these green

product(s), use the part(s) described in this manual and lead-free solder (*2).

For (*1) and (*2), see the next page.

DOCUMENT CREATED IN JAPAN, June, 2009 GREEN

Page 97

DVD LOADER DSM3

OPU

SPINDLE/ STEPING/ SLED MOTOR

MD_DVD, MD_CD

RF, A, B, C, D, E, F

DVD_CD, DVD_LD, CD_LD

TR+/-, FO+/-, MOT_LD+/-, MOT_SLED+/MOT_SPDL+/-

HOME, TIN_SW, TOUT_SW

Motor Drive

IC2301

LA6565VR-TLM-E

SPINDLE/SLED/ FOCUS/TRACK_PWM, TRAY_CLOSE/OPEN

SPDL_SENS+/-

HA0~A19, HD0~D15, MEMCS0, RD, WR

DVD BLOCK DIAGRAM

MPEG/MICON/DSP/RF_AMP

IC4001

ZR36966ELCG-D-G

APWM_L+/-, APWM_R+/-

AUDIO AMP

IC8501

NJM4565M(TE1)

DUPRD1

DUPTD1

TIN_SW

SPDIF

DAC_VIDEO_C/D

DAC_VIDEO_A

RESET

SYS_MUTE

DVD_AUDIO_L

DVD_AUDIO_R

LCD BLOCK

START_SW

SPDIF-134

C_VIDEO

Y_VIDEO

DVD RESET

ZERO

DVD_A_OUT_L

DVD_A_OUT_R

FLASH 16M

IC4007

SST39VF1601-70-4C-EKE

SD_A0~A11

SD_D0~D15

RAMDQM, CLK, CKE, WE#, CAS#, CS0#, CS1#, RAS# SD_BA0

64M SDRAM

IC4005

EM638165TS-6G

F-1 19DV616DG/22DV616DG F-2

Page 98

POWER BLOCK DIAGRAM

AC IN

518

AT+12

CD501

J501

POWER CTL

IC501 FA5571N-D1-TE1

VCC

F501

L501

4 3

2 1

SWITCHING

Q501

2SK3532-01MR

D511

D507 D508 D510

C502

㪝㪜㪜㪛㩷㪙㪘㪚㪢㪠

C505

INVERTER CTL IC7001 BD9893F-E2

TRANSFORMER

T501

D517

D514

D523

D515

REGULATOR IC502 KIA431A-AT

DRIVE Q7004

POWER FAIL SW

KTA1504S_Y_RTK

T7001

1 8

Q505

POWER FAIL

SOUND +B

SOUND GND

AT+5.8V

GND

INV +B

INV_GND

LIGHT_CTL

INVERTER_H

CP7001_HV

CP7001_LV

CP7002_LV

CP7002_HV

F-3 19DV616DG F-4

Page 99

POWER BLOCK DIAGRAM

AC IN

518

AT+12V

7007

CD501

J501

POWER CTL IC501 FA5571N-D1-TE1

VCC

F501

L501

4 3

2 1

INVERTER CTL IC7001 MP1008-ES-LF-Z

SWITCHING

Q501

2SK3532-01MR

D511

D507 D508 D510

Q7001

Q7005

C502

T7001

T7002

TRANS FORMER

T501

FEED BACK

C505

2 7

D517

D514

D523

D515

REGULATOR IC502 KIA431A-AT

POWER FAIL SW

KTA1504S_Y_RTK

CP7001

CP7002

CP7003

CP7004

Q505

POWER FAIL

SOUND +B

SOUND GND

AT+5.8V

GND

INV+B

INV_GND

INVERTER_H

LIGHT_CTL

F-5 22DV616DG F-6

Page 100

21PIN/TUNER BLOCK DIAGRAM

TUNER_SDA

TVRX

DTV_TX/RX

J4206

R_OUT 1 SC1_A_OUT_R L_OUT 3 SC1_A_OUT_L

L_IN 2 R_IN 6

21-B_IN 7 SCART1_R/C1

_ __

21-G IN 11 SCART1 G IN

SCART 1 21-R_IN 15 SCART1_B_IN

TU5801 TUNER AGC 4 RF_AGC SCL 9 BUS_SW IC5801 TC74VHC4053AFT SDA 10 15 SCL F_SCL 1 F_SCL SIF 14 14 SDA F_SDA 13 F_SDA CVBS 15 TUNER_SCL 2

IF AGC 18 DIF1 19 SIF DIF2 20

CP5801 FROM/TO DIGITAL IF OUT2 29 IF OUT1 27 IF AGC 30 CVBSOUT 6 SPDIF 22 D_TUNER_SPDIF TUNER_SDA 25 TUNER_SCL 23 AOUTR 1 D_TU_AUDIO_R AOUTL 2 D_TU_AUDIO_L LPM_INT 3 TVTX 5

DTV-H 7 DTV-H POWER CTL 9 DTV_LPM_CTL-H RESET 10 DTV_RESET Y/Y S-VIDEO 12 U/C S-VIDEO 14 D_TUNER_Y/U/V V16 +12V 17 P.CON +12V D+5V 18 DVD+5V

DTV+3.8V

(21-C_IN)

21-Y_IN 16 SCART1_Y_IN

FOR_VCR 8 SCART1_SW

TUNER OUT CVBS SW IC4202 MM1502XNRE

MONITOR OUT

VIDEO IN 20 SCART1_V_IN

19 SC1_CVBS_OUT

19 20 DTV+3.8V 21

SC1_A_IN_L SC1_A_IN_R

TU_VIDEO_OUT

D_TUNER_CVBS

SCALER/ SUB MICON

SOUND AMP/AV SWITCH/ JACK/INTERFACE_HDMI IC

F-7 19DV616DG/22DV616DG F-8